Quarterlytics / Advertising Agencies / Ebiquity

Ebiquity

ebq · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker ebq
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Advertising Agencies
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2019 Annual Report · Ebiquity
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual 
report
2019

E

b

i

q

u

i

t

y

p

l

c

|

A

n

n

u

a

l

r

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

f

i

n

a

n

c

i

a

l

s

t

a

t

e

m

e

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

y

e

a

r

e

n

d

e

d

3

1

D

e

c

e

m

b

e

r

2

0

1

9

Annual report and 
financial statements
for the year ended 
31 December 2019

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Our purpose

Ebiquity is the leading global independent  
media and marketing consultancy.

We exist to help brands optimise 
return on investment from their 
marketing spend.

In the increasingly digital, ever-more 
complex media and marketing 
ecosystem, we work with many of the 
world’s leading advertisers to improve 
marketing outcomes and enhance 
business performance.

We do this by harnessing the power of 
the best data, the best analytics talent 
and tools, and the best marketing 
technology available.

By helping to build evidence-based 
marketing programmes, we enable our 
clients to extract full value from their 
investments, drive accountability and 
transparency into their media supply 
chain, and create sustainable 
partnerships with the right agency 
and technology partners.

By creating clarity in all aspects of 
media and marketing and by aligning 
their interests behind clear business 
objectives, we enable advertisers to 
achieve better marketing outcomes.

Ebiquity. Creating clarity in media 
and marketing. Enhancing business 
performance.

Visit us online at  
www.ebiquity.com/en/investors

Strategic report

Corporate governance

Statement of Independence 

Highlights 

Chairman’s statement 

Executive review 

Client lifecycle 

02

03

04

06

14

Practice reviews 

People, community 
and environment 

Section 172 statement 

Risks 

Contents

Strategic  
report
An overview of key  
actions and events in  
2019 and early 2020, 
together with our 
priorities as we  
move forward.

Corporate  
governance
This section provides 
information on how  
the Company is  
governed and the 
activities of  
the Board.

Board of Directors 

Corporate  
governance report 

Audit & Risk  
Committee report 

Financial  
statements
This section includes  
our financial statements, 
notes and auditors’ 
report for the Group 
and Company.

Statement of Directors’  
responsibilities 

Independent auditors’ report 

Consolidated  
income statement 

Consolidated statement  
of comprehensive income 

Consolidated statement  
of financial position 

Consolidated statement  
of changes in equity 

Consolidated statement  
of cash flows 

32

Remuneration  
Committee report 

34

Directors’ report 

40

53

54

62

63

Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 

Company statement  
of financial position 

Company statement  
of changes in equity 

Notes to the Company  
financial statements 

64

Advisers 

Shareholder information 

Glossary 

65

66

16

26

28

29

43

49

67

106

107

108

119

119

120

01

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Financial statementsStatement of Independence

As the leading global independent media and marketing 
consultancy, we believe it is vital that we are entirely independent 
of the media supply chain and the provision of marketing 
services whose performance we help to optimise.

It is the independence of our expert 
consultants that allows us to give 
genuinely impartial advice; advice 
that helps our clients choose the right 
partners, tools, and technologies to 
achieve better marketing outcomes 
and enhance business performance. 
This core and defining principle of 
impartiality is enshrined in this, our 
Statement of Independence.

In order to provide independent, 
unbiased, and trusted advice in 
the marketplace, we have remained 
firmly media agnostic over our 
20+ year history.

These principles are designed to ensure 
that we operate with our clients’ best 
interests in mind. This is of growing 
importance in a marketing ecosystem 
that is often highly opaque and 
becoming increasingly complex. 

This Statement of Independence is 
available on the Ebiquity website at 
https://bit.ly/3bfhzpc.

By engaging with advertisers, agencies, 
and the leading national and global 
marketing associations, we are helping 
to define industry standards. 
That’s also why we have published the 
Ebiquity Code of Conduct, which sets 
out the standards and practices that 
we adhere to and that we believe 
brands should demand of their 
independent consultants. It covers 
independence, remuneration, 
confidentiality, data processing, 
and ways of working.

The Ebiquity Code of Conduct 
is also available on our website,  
at https://bit.ly/2Vi0fu7.

We adhere to the following key 
principles of independence:

›	›	 we do not offer media execution 

and trading services;

›	›	 we do not engage in media buying or 
conduct any negotiations with media 
owners or publishers on behalf of our 
clients;

›	›	 we are independent of the media 
supply chain and do not pitch for 
media work or compete with media 
agencies in their core media trading 
capabilities;

›	›	 our focus in media is on advocating a 
media supply chain that operates in 
the interest of advertisers;

›	›	 we occasionally work with clients on 
‘test and learn’ projects that involve 
some media buying, almost always 
conducted by their media agencies, 
where we focus entirely on 
measurement to help independently 
optimise media performance; and

›	›	 while we work closely with our clients’ 
media agencies, we are not directly 
associated with any media agency 
or media owner in a way that 
compromises our neutrality 
in  the marketplace.

02

Ebiquity plcHighlights

Highlights

Media: 
Media Management, Media Performance 
and Contract Compliance 

Revenue of £68.7m (2018: £69.4m)

Revenue of £54.6m, increased by 1% 

Underlying operating profit1 of £6.2m (2018: £6.3m) 

Contract Compliance revenue increased by 13%

Underlying profit before tax1 increased to £5.3m 
(2018: £5.2m) 

Media Performance and Media Management revenue  
declined by 1%

Strong balance sheet: net debt at 31 December 2019 
reduced significantly to £5.6m (31 December 2018: 
£27.5m) following completion of AdIntel sale in  
January 2019

Shared service media delivery centre in Spain 
expanding and delivering operational efficiencies

Improved operating cash flow conversion of 144%  
(2018: 138%) 

Analytics & Tech: 
Advanced Analytics, MarTech and AdTech

Significant client wins include Amazon, Facebook, Nike, 
Verizon Wireless and Volvo

Impairment charge of £5.8m taken in relation to 
Stratigent, the loss-making US MarTech business, 
following decision to wind down its operation

Revenue of £14.1m; excluding Stratigent, increased 
by 11% 

Operating profit of £1.0m 

Nick Waters, former Executive Chairman, UK and 
Ireland, Dentsu Aegis Network, appointed Group Chief 
Executive Officer with effect from 1 July 2020

Advanced Analytics practice expanded into France 
and USA 

AdTech advisory practice increased revenue by 105% 

1.  Underlying operating profit is defined as the operating profit excluding highlighted items. These include share-based payments, amortisation 

of purchased intangibles and non-recurring items. Underlying profit before tax is calculated based on the underlying operating profit.

03

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsChairman’s statement

“Ebiquity is now a more 
streamlined business 
that is focused 
on becoming the leading 
global independent 
media and marketing 
consultancy.”

Rob Woodward

  Chairman

COVID-19
Since the beginning of 2020, the 
outbreak of the COVID-19 pandemic 
has created an unprecedented and 
uncertain economic environment for 
all businesses. 

Our global business largely switched 
to remote working from March 2020 
onwards and has continued to deliver 
high-quality services to clients as usual 
throughout the period of the COVID-19 
disruption. Maintaining the health and 
safety of all our staff has been a 
priority and we are proud of the 
admirable resilience and flexibility 
they have shown in responding to 
the challenges they face during these 
difficult times. At the time of writing, 
we are pleased that units in some 
countries, such as China and Germany, 
are now re-opening their offices. 

Ebiquity plays a key role in providing 
clarity and transparency to advertisers 
on their media spend but that means 
our business is influenced by the macro 
trends in the advertising markets. 
The unprecedented economic 
disruption caused by the reaction 
to COVID-19 has led to significant 
reductions in current and forecast 
global advertising spend which is 
affecting our business in the 
current year. 

This impact varies considerably both 
between and within sectors and 
geographies. Some clients, especially 
in the automotive sector, in which 
Ebiquity has a strong presence, and in 
travel, leisure and non-food retail, have 
reduced their service requirements 
although many others have remained 
resilient. Clients are also adjusting their 
plans frequently both upwards as well 
as downwards as their business outlook 
evolves. 

The Group has undertaken prudent 
cost reduction measures to strengthen 
and protect the business in the current 
environment and further to support our 
liquidity position. These include 
temporary salary reductions for the 
Board and a number of senior 
managers and staff and the use of 
government job retention and support 
schemes in various countries, including 
Australia, France, UK and USA. 
We have modified the covenants on our 
banking facilities and deferred part of 
the consideration payable for the 
previously announced buy-out of the 
Italian minority. Although the Group is 
in a healthy financial position with 
sufficient liquidity to manage the 
COVID-19 disruption, the Board has 
decided to defer the payment of 
dividends until economic and business 
conditions are more certain. 

Business review 
This annual report covers Ebiquity’s 
first full year following the sale of the 
Advertising Intelligence (‘AdIntel’) 
business to Nielsen Media Research 
(‘Nielsen’) which completed on 
2 January 2019. Ebiquity is now a more 
streamlined business that is focused 
on becoming the leading global 
independent media and marketing 
consultancy, helping advertisers to 
measure, evaluate, and maximise 
returns from their marketing spend. 
The significant reduction in net debt as 
a result of the sale has strengthened 
the Group’s financial position, giving it 
greater flexibility to invest in developing 
the business organically, and build 
through selective acquisitions, such as 
that of Digital Decisions announced in 
January 2020. 

In addition to the structural evolution 
of the business during the past 15 
months, there have been significant 
changes in the Group’s executive 
leadership. Alan Newman joined as 
Chief Financial Officer at the start of 
2019 and has strengthened the Group’s 
financial management controls and 
operational processes. Towards the end 
of the year, Michael Karg stepped down 
as Chief Executive Officer after nearly 
four years in that role and I would like 
to record the Board’s appreciation for 
his contribution to Ebiquity over 
that time. 

04

Ebiquity plc 
In April 2020, we announced the 
appointment of Nick Waters as CEO 
with effect from 1 July 2020. 
Nick brings more than 20 years’ 
experience in senior executive roles at 
leading international media, digital, and 
advertising businesses, most recently 
at Dentsu Aegis. I thank Alan for his 
strong leadership and commitment to 
the business in the role of Interim CEO 
after Michael’s departure, particularly 
throughout the challenging 
environment caused by COVID-19. 
Nick and Alan have highly 
complementary skills and experience, 
which will significantly strengthen the 
executive team.

As previously highlighted, 2019 was a 
year of transition. We are therefore 
pleased to report that our underlying 
operating profit for 2019 was in line 
with expectations at £6.2 million, 
largely driven by tight cost control. 
Revenue performance, however, was 
not as strong as anticipated earlier in 
the year. Group revenue was 1% lower 
than the prior year at £68.7 million, 
compared to £69.4 million, although 
excluding Stratigent, which was wound 
down in September 2019, it grew by 2% 
on a like-for-like basis. Revenue in 
Media, our largest segment, was up 
1% year-on-year, due to Contract 
Compliance, which grew well. Although 
Analytics & Tech total revenue reduced 
by 7%, Advanced Analytics and AdTech 
both recorded strong growth so that, 
excluding Stratigent, Analytics & Tech 
revenue grew by 11%. 

Good progress was made during the 
year towards realigning the cost 
structure of the business with the 
revenue base without the AdIntel 
business. The Group’s total underlying 
costs (excluding highlighted items) 
reduced by 1% to £62.6 million, from 
£63.0 million, and there was a 
reduction of 3% in the total year-end 
staff numbers. This was achieved 
despite the Group having to bear 
continuing costs of the transitional 
agreement to deliver support services 
to Nielsen post the AdIntel sale. 

The Board and management team are 
pursuing opportunities to deliver 
further efficiency gains across the 
business while also maintaining 
investments to support growth in 
high potential service areas, such as 
advanced analytics. 

Through this transitional period, 
Ebiquity is in a strong position as 
a leading independent, global 
consultancy, to satisfy the growing 
demand from brand owners for 
specialist consulting services to enable 
them to optimise their marketing 
expenditure. Our advantages include 
our consultancy independence, 
excellent client base and access to data 
that this provides, and the breadth of 
our services, which range from media 
performance reviews, media 
management advice and contract 
compliance through to advanced 
analytics and advertising technology 
consulting. This range is unmatched by 
our competition at a global level, as is 
our network of media experts located 
in 15 of the main media markets in 
Europe, North America, Asia and 
Australasia. The US market in 
particular, where Ebiquity has 
traditionally underperformed as a 
business, remains a key opportunity 
due both to its domestic scale and its 
role as the base for many global 
advertisers. 

Our long-held view that advertisers’ 
need for transparency is best met 
through independent advice has been 
reinforced by Accenture’s 
announcement of its withdrawal 
from media auditing and management 
advisory services from September 
2020, resulting from its expansion 
into media buying and programmatic 
advertising services. This is already 
providing opportunities for Ebiquity 
and we have won contracts with a 
number of clients around the world 
previously served by Accenture. 

The priorities set by the Board for the 
CEO and the management team are to 
re-establish revenue growth and to 
improve the Group’s operating margins 
over the medium term. In support of 
this, the Group’s strategy remains to 
increase the revenue share from 
‘forward-looking’ advisory services 
which help brands to plan and organise 
their media and marketing activities. 
We expect the new CEO with his 
significant media and agency expertise 
to make a significant contribution to 
the execution of this strategy as well 
as to the Group’s business 
development activities. 

Ebiquity’s performance in 2020 will 
depend in part on the overall health of 
the global economy and advertising 
markets whose outlook remains highly 
uncertain. We will continue to take a 
prudent approach to cost management 
and incorporate lessons learned from 
dealing with the COVID-19 crisis, as 
well as pursuing planned measures to 
streamline our processes and enhance 
our service offering. 

Looking ahead, the Board believes 
that Ebiquity’s capabilities and leading 
position in its market, together with 
a strengthened management team 
under the new CEO, will enable it to 
meet the challenges of the COVID-19 
disruption and successfully achieve its 
long-term goals as we emerge from the 
global crisis. 

Rob Woodward 
Chairman

20 May 2020

05

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsExecutive review

“Ebiquity’s offer 

meets advertisers’ 
requirements and 
is matched by few 
competitors operating 
at a global level.”

Alan Newman
Interim Chief Executive Officer/Chief Financial Officer

Strategic direction
With the digital revolution and resulting 
explosion of marketing channels, the 
demand from brands for independent 
media and marketing consulting 
services continues to grow. Ebiquity is 
in a unique position to be their leading 
provider and adviser, enabling them to 
monitor, evaluate, and maximise 
returns from their media spend. 

We have defined clearly our aim of 
becoming the lead adviser to Chief 
Marketing Officers (‘CMOs’) who are 
increasingly called upon to justify and 
explain with clarity the contribution 
that marketing spend makes to the 
performance of their business. 

There are few unbiased, expert-led, 
data-driven consultancies in our 
marketplace. It is clear that 
independent, conflict-free, high-quality 
advice is increasingly valued by 
advertisers. Ebiquity’s offer, through 
our portfolio of specialised consultancy 
services, meets advertisers’ 
requirements and is matched by few, 
if any, competitors operating at a 
global level. 

Ebiquity’s services map into all the key 
stages of our clients’ media lifecycle. 
These include:

›	›	 designing the media model, including 
internal and external structures;

›	›	 managing and selecting partners, 
including media and creative 
agencies and digital advertising 
services; 

›	›	 defining objectives, including partner 

goals and commitments;

›	›	 evaluating outcomes;

›	›	 optimising plans; and

›	›	 reviewing compliance with 
contractual obligations.

Our primary differentiators are:

›	›	 our clear global leadership in 

providing core media performance 
services – we are acknowledged by 
the World Federation of Advertisers 
as the world’s largest independent 
media adviser and leader in media 
benchmarking, agency management, 
and contract compliance;

›	›	 our reach among top advertisers 

– serving 70 of the world’s top 100 
advertisers through our 18 offices in 
the largest advertising markets;

›	›	 our data – we have the largest 
global pool of advertising spend 
data, covering over $50 billion; and 

›	›	 our analytics – a market-leading 

analytics capability and platform. 
Its quality is reflected in a record 
five awards at the Institute of 
Practitioners in Advertising (‘IPA’) 
Effectiveness Awards for our clients, 
including Direct Line Group, Lidl, 
Weetabix, and Taylors of Harrogate.

We recognise that in order to maintain 
our leadership position and grow our 
business, we need to remain ahead of 
our competitors in terms of innovation, 
skills and service quality. We need 
in particular to reinforce our 
capabilities in being able to provide 
‘forward-looking’ consulting analytics 
and advice as well as in reporting and 
assessing historic media performance. 

06

Ebiquity plc 
 
Our acquisition of Digital Decisions complements 
and enhances our digital media performance offering.

Accordingly, we are continuing to invest 
in growing our analytics and advisory 
businesses. We are also enhancing our 
infrastructure to allow us to handle our 
unique client data sets more efficiently 
and help our core Media practice to 
generate high-quality analysis and 
insights upon which our clients can 
make decisions. Our ‘MediaSuite’ of 
automated applications covering data 
ingestion, media agency selection, and 
digital media benchmarking contribute 
to this. Our Media Management service 
is also innovating. For example, 
it recently launched an ‘Agency 
Capabilities Review’ to help advertisers 
to ensure the effective management of 
their agency relationships. This was 
successfully piloted with a global 
automotive group. 

Keeping pace with developments in 
digital media is clearly vital for our 
business. Its greater complexity and 
the growing range of channels and 
intermediaries through which digital 
advertising money passes require the 
ability rapidly to obtain and analyse 
data and report on it to advertisers. 

Our acquisition of Digital Decisions 
in January 2020 complements and 
enhances our digital media 
performance offering. It provides a 
digital media monitoring service 
(on an annual subscription basis), 
primarily targeted at procurement 
and media heads of global brands, 
and provides them with regular 
oversight on their digital advertising 
performance. Digital Decisions’ 
technology applications ingest data 
‘from source’ from agencies and 
provide recommendations for actions 
to improve digital media performance. 
Their system is designed to scale as a 
self-service solution and its relatively 
low delivery costs should lead to high 
margins over time. Integration with 
Ebiquity’s platforms should also 
benefit our existing media 
performance services. 

We recognise that achieving higher 
revenue growth requires strong 
relationships with current and potential 
clients and a clear understanding of 
their needs so as to tailor our services. 
A significant challenge is that only a 
small minority of the Group’s clients 
buy more than one of our services. 
At the beginning of 2019, we created 
a team of dedicated (UK-based) client 
account leaders to manage 
relationships with our key global clients. 
This initiative, supported by detailed 
account plans, led to revenue from the 
clients managed by this team growing 
by 18% during the year. 

5 awards

Our Analytics practice won five 
awards at the IPA Effectiveness 
Awards for clients including Direct 
Line Group, Lidl, Weetabix and 
Taylors of Harrogate.

Much of this increase was generated 
by introducing Analytics, AdTech and 
Media Management services into these 
clients in addition to the traditional 
Media Performance services. We plan 
to expand this programme to cover 
more clients and our non-UK offices, 
as well as to improve targeting and 
planning for all client accounts. 

Communication and marketing of 
Ebiquity’s services and thought 
leadership on media developments is 
essential in strengthening our market 
position and supporting our business 
growth. The appointment of Debbie 
Morrison from ISBA, early in 2019, 
as Managing Director, Global 
Partnerships & Events has helped to 
increase awareness of Ebiquity among 
senior marketing professionals and to 
enhance our programme of dedicated 
marketing events. This has included 
establishing a Client Council made up 
of senior media executives from leading 
global advertisers to provide advice on 
key advertiser concerns and feedback 
on how our services address these. 

We have also continued to 
communicate on key industry issues 
and our innovations through the media, 
online channels and our own 
publications. Early in 2019, ‘Tipping 
Point’, a joint study by our Media and 
Analytics practices, was published. 
This explained that TV’s ability to 
provide mass audience reach is 
diminishing faster than previously 
thought. This attracted many 
(positive and negative) reactions 
in national and international media. 
It was followed by ‘Mind the Gap’, 
published in January 2020, which 
combines Ebiquity’s data and audience 
research to help identify how 
advertisers can improve their use of 
online channels to reach their target 
audiences. One of its data-backed 
conclusions on the effectiveness 
(or lack of it) of Facebook 
advertising also attracted 
much industry comment. 

07

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsExecutive review continued

Performance in the year 
Group revenue in the year to 31 December 2019 fell by 1% to £68.7 million although it grew by 2% on a like-for-like basis excluding 
Stratigent, which was wound down in September 2019. 

Our aim in 2019 was to stabilise and re-focus the business following a year (2018) in which the Group’s costs had grown ahead 
of its revenue and its overall performance had been below expectations. We succeeded in delivering an overall profit result that 
was in line with expectations, although our revenue base did not grow in line with our original plans and the performance of our 
business segments varied significantly. 

FY19 
£m 

54.6 

14.1 

68.7 

Revenue

FY18 
£m 

54.2 

15.2 

69.4 

Variance 
£m 

0.4 

(1.0) 

(0.6) 

%

1%

(7%)

(1%)

%

(1%)

13%

1%

5%

105%

(39%)

(7%)

Our Media Performance practice, 
which remains our largest single 
revenue contributor, assists advertisers 
to monitor and evaluate their agencies’ 
media buying performance. 
It harnesses the expert knowledge of 
our global network of media specialists, 
the most extensive of its kind, and our 
access to unique client media spend 
data pools to assess the value for 
money delivered, both in comparison to 
the market and to the client’s specific 
objectives. This helps brand owners to 
obtain accountability and transparency 
over the performance of their chosen 
media supply partners, especially given 
the industry’s complex purchasing 
arrangements. Major clients for this 
practice include General Motors, 
L’Oreal and Beiersdorf. 

The Media Management practice 
advises clients on topics such as the 
management and selection of media 
agencies and setting of media buying 
objectives, as well as the organisation 
of media functions. It conducts close to 
100 agency selections annually, both at 
global level and within individual 
markets for clients such as JLR, 
McDonalds and Orange. This service is 
now supported by our new proprietary 
tool, ‘Select’, which was launched in 
2018 and enables us to automate the 
comparison of the rates offered by 
agencies in their tenders. Media 
Management revenue, however, still 
depends to an extent on the level of 
global media agency pitches occurring 
in the market and there were fewer of 
these in 2019 than in the prior year.

Media 

Analytics & Tech 

Group 

Practice growth rates 

Media 

Media Performance and Management  

Contract Compliance 

Total Media 

Analytics & Tech 

Advanced Analytics 

AdTech 

MarTech 

Total Analytics & Tech 

Media 
Our Media segment, which accounted 
for 79% of our total revenue and 
comprises Media Performance, 
Media Management and Contract 
Compliance services, reported a 
modest increase in revenue to 
£54.6 million (2018: £54.2 million). 
Within this, Contract Compliance 
(branded as FirmDecisions) performed 
successfully with revenue growth of 
13%, while revenue from Media 
Performance and Management fell by 
1% overall. 

08

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
There were significant regional 
variations in business performance 
across our network. UK & Ireland, our 
largest Media region, grew revenue by 
2%, due mainly to its specialist 
international group which manages 
multi-market projects for global 
advertisers such as Fiat Chrysler 
Automobiles and PepsiCo and which 
won a number of new projects. Within 
Continental Europe, Italy was the best 
performer with 21% growth, supported 
by the launch of an innovative social 
media measurement service, and 
France grew by 2%, with clients 
including L’Oreal and PSA, the 
automotive group. Conversely, revenue 
fell in Germany (by 8%) and Russia 
(by 7%). New country managers have 
been appointed in both units and 
their performance improved in the 
second half. 

The USA had a challenging year, 
but still managed to remain flat on the 
prior year. It won some significant new 
Media Performance clients (e.g. Verizon 
Wireless) but had fewer Media 
Management opportunities than 
expected. There were also performance 
issues in the US sales team which was 
previously shared with Stratigent and 
which the new US MD, appointed in 
May, has focused on resolving. 
Asia Pacific revenue fell by 9% for 
the full year, although it achieved 
second-half growth following a 19% 
decline in the first half which was due 
to lower demand from traditional 
higher-spending sectors, such as 
FMCG and retail. China returned to 
modest revenue growth in the year, 
benefiting from a renewed focus on 
serving international advertisers that 
require support in this expanding but 
challenging media market. 

One of our key aims is to improve 
quality of service and reduce cost of 
delivery in Media through process 
improvements and automation. 
During the year, our automation 
strategy focused on rolling out three 
key MediaSuite tools in which we have 
invested significantly over recent years: 
EbiquityConnect™, EbiquitySelect™ and 
EbiquitySync™. These are designed to 
increase the speed and efficiency of 
analysis work and improve data 
security and handling. 
EbiquityConnect™ streamlines data 
ingestion from agencies, many of which 
have given positive feedback following 
the system’s introduction. 
EbiquitySelectTM supports our agency 
selection work. EbiquitySync™ provides 
a standardised tool for benchmarking 
paid digital media spend. Within digital 
services, we have also been developing 
specialist methods for assessing paid 
search and paid social media spend. 
Over the next year, we will utilise the 
recently acquired Digital Decisions 
technology applications further to 
automate both data ingestion and 
reporting of results to clients for 
Media Performance work. 

Our shared services media delivery 
centre (‘SDC’) in Spain is enabling 
media data analysis work to be 
centralised and standardised. 
This reduces delivery costs and frees 
up the time of specialist consultants 
in local markets for higher value-added 
activities. It became fully operational 
at the beginning of 2019 and the level 
of work taken on from the network 
increased steadily through the year. 
The SDC is already beginning to yield 
clear cost savings as well as quality 
benefits for the Media practice.

Contract Compliance (branded as 
‘FirmDecisions’) supports brands by 
helping to ensure that agencies deliver 
services as contractually agreed 
through reviews conducted by a 
team of specialists. FirmDecisions is 
regarded as the global leader in this 
market, publicly acknowledged by 
industry bodies as an expert in the 
field. Its strong revenue growth reflects 
growing demand by advertisers for its 
in-depth financial compliance services 
as a means of ensuring transparency 
and accountability among their media 
buying partners. FirmDecisions 
continued to extend its global client list, 
with recent additions including Amex, 
Microsoft, and Sanofi, as well as 
expanding its local operations in 
markets such as Dubai, Germany, 
and India. 

Focus on 
automation

Focus on 
shared 
services

During the year we rolled out 
three Media Suite tools – Ebiquity 
ConnectTM, Ebiquity SelectTM and 
Ebiquity SyncTM.

Our shared service media delivery 
centre in Spain became fully 
operational in 2019.

09

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsExecutive review continued

Analytics & Tech
Analytics & Tech total revenue fell 
by 7% in the year to £14.1 million 
(2018: £15.2 million) but this decline 
was entirely due to the MarTech 
practice, comprising Stratigent and 
Digital Balance, whose revenue fell by 
39%. In contrast, Advanced Analytics, 
the largest element, grew by 5% and 
AdTech more than doubled its revenue 
with growth of 105%. 

Our Advanced Analytics practice helps 
brands to plan and optimise their 
investment in media. Its team, which 
includes data scientists, 
econometricians and statisticians, 
applies advanced analytical techniques 
to attribute and forecast the impact of 
marketing investments on business 
outcomes (e.g. sales) and to optimise 
these investments. The scope of its 
work covers traditional and digital 
media channels as well as factors 
such as pricing and promotions and, 
in recent projects, factory capacity. 
Its methods include market mix 
modelling, brand equity modelling 
and forecasting which are increasingly 
supported by automated planning 
tools that it delivers to clients. 

During the year, Advanced Analytics 
continued to expand its client base, 
winning significant global projects, 
including with Volkswagen and a global 
telecoms group, and won its first 
project in the USA for an automotive 
group. This practice is managed 
globally from the UK where the largest 
part of its team of data scientists and 
analytics specialists are located, 
supported by a growing delivery 
capability based in Spain. 
Its operations expanded to France 
during the year with the appointment 
of a well-regarded senior analytics 
specialist, who will contribute both 
to sales and delivery of projects. 

This has already led to winning a major 
project for a leading European airline. 
However, as previously reported, 
revenue in the year was impacted in the 
first half by an unexpected, substantial 
reduction in demand from a UK retail 
client. As anticipated, the practice 
recovered well in the second half. 

One challenge is that our analytics 
practice is competing for data analysis 
skills that are in high demand by large 
companies in sectors such as digital 
platforms and financial services. 
To address this, we have established 
a graduate trainee scheme to help 
develop our own talent pool. 

Our AdTech practice, which was 
established two years ago, helps brand 
owners to address the specific 
challenges of managing digital media 
and automated trading programmes 
by designing the data and technology 
ecosystem best suited to deliver their 
marketing strategy and optimise their 
digital media investments. 
Their solutions include the evaluation 
and planning of in-housing alternatives 
and the selection of advertising 
technology partners. The rapid growth 
of our AdTech practice since its launch 
in 2018 reflects the demand for its 
specialist services as well as the 
expertise of the team that we have 
assembled. During the year, its major 
projects included in-housing of digital 
media buying for two global brands 
and for a leading global energy group 
based in the USA. The latter resulted 
from the appointment of a US AdTech 
lead in mid-2019. We anticipate further 
growth in this important market. 

Our MarTech practice comprised 
two units at the start of 2019, Digital 
Balance in Australia and Stratigent in 
the USA. Both of these provided similar 
website technology and data advisory 
services, but their recent performance 
has differed significantly. 

Digital Balance helps brands to improve 
the effectiveness of their digital 
presence and provides a range of 
consulting, analytics, and optimisation 
services across a variety of website 
analytics platforms, including Google 
Analytics and Adobe. Until the middle 
of 2019, Digital Balance had grown its 
client base and revenue consistently 
since its acquisition by the Group in 
2017. In the first half, its revenue 
increased by 36% compared to the 
same period in 2018. However, in the 
second half of 2019, several major 
clients deferred or cancelled projects 
unexpectedly, which led to full-year 
revenue falling by 15% compared to 
prior year. A new leadership team 
has been appointed and will be 
integrating Digital Balance more fully 
with the Australian media practice 
through joint digital products and 
cross-selling to Media clients. 

In the USA, Stratigent’s revenue had 
been declining over several years, 
mainly due to its business having 
focused on a software application 
whose use has been reducing in the 
USA. It also faced increasing price 
competition from independent and 
offshore suppliers. Actions taken at 
the beginning of 2019 to reposition the 
business and target new clients failed 
to yield sufficient new revenue. With a 
loss projected for 2019 and a very 
uncertain longer-term outlook, the 
business was wound down with effect 
from September 2019. This led to an 
impairment charge of £5.8 million 
being recognised as a highlighted item. 
The Chicago office where Stratigent 
and AdIntel USA had been based was 
subsequently closed and a sub-tenant 
found for the remainder of the lease. 

10

Ebiquity plcOperating profit by segment 

Media 

Analytics & Tech 

Unallocated costs 

Group  

Underlying operating profit 

Operating profit margin

FY19 

£m 

11.8 

1.0 

(6.6) 

6.2 

FY18 

Variance 

£m 

12.1 

1.4 

(7.1) 

6.3 

£m 

(0.2) 

(0.4) 

0.5 

(0.2) 

% 

(2%) 

(31%) 

7% 

(3%) 

FY19 

% 

22% 

7% 

— 

9% 

FY18

%

22%

9%

—

9%

Group operating profit of £6.2 million was slightly lower than in 2018, with a reduction of £0.6 million in the main operating 
segments, offset by a £0.5 million reduction in unallocated central costs. This partly reflects more costs being borne directly 
by the operating segments. The reduction in Media profits was largely due to the international media group and the USA. 
Analytics & Tech’s fall in operating profit was mainly due to the losses arising in Stratigent and Digital Balance, both of which 
achieved small profits in 2018. 

We continue to monitor the trends in 
the market closely and to maintain 
careful control over costs. We have 
strong liquidity resulting from the sale 
of AdIntel, extension of our banking 
facilities and the cost reduction 
measures already implemented. 
We have also agreed modifications to 
our banking covenants from July 2020 
to May 2021. The Board remains 
confident that, building on our 
strategic position in the market and 
under the leadership of our new CEO, 
Ebiquity is well-placed as we emerge 
from the crisis to fulfil its potential as 
the leading independent media and 
marketing consultancy operating on 
a global level.

Outlook 
In 2019, the Group made significant 
progress following the AdIntel disposal 
that positions it well for the future. 
The forthcoming closure of Accenture’s 
media auditing practice highlights the 
importance to clients of independence 
in our business, and has led to 
significant new business wins. 

However, in the current year, the 
COVID-19 pandemic is having an 
adverse impact on our clients and 
our own business although this varies 
between and within sectors and 
geographies. Business has continued as 
usual for some clients while others have 
reduced their service requirements for 
varying periods. Ebiquity’s performance 
is influenced by global economic and 
advertising conditions, which remain 
highly uncertain. Therefore the outlook 
for our business in 2020 is difficult to 
predict with confidence and 
we continue to withhold guidance.

11

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Executive review continued

Financial review 

Group revenues for the year ended 
31 December 2019 fell by £0.6 million 
or 1%, to £68.7 million. 

Underlying operating profit (statutory 
operating profit excluding highlighted 
items) for 2019 was £6.2 million, 
a decrease of £0.2 million, or 3%, 
from the prior year. Project-related 
costs (which comprise external partner 
and production costs) increased by 
0.5% from £8.8 million to £8.9million. 
Operating expenses reduced by 1% 
to £53.7 million from £54.2 million. As a 
result, the operating margin remained 
in line with the prior year at 9%.

Underlying profit before tax 
increased to £5.3 million in 2019 (2018: 
£5.2 million). Net finance costs were 
£0.9 million in 2019 compared with 
£1.2 million in 2018. The reduced cost 
reflects lower average gross debt in 
2019 compared with 2018. 

There was a statutory operating 
loss (after highlighted items) of 
£4.2 million compared to a loss of 
£1.4 million in 2018. Highlighted costs 
increased by £2.7 million as detailed 
below. This led to a reported loss before 
tax of £5.1 million compared to a loss of 
£2.5 million in 2018.

Cash conversion 

Reported cash from operations  

Underlying cash from operations 

Underlying operating profit/(loss) 

Cash conversion 

Highlighted items 
Highlighted items before taxation 
for the continuing business totalled 
£10.3 million in the year to 
December 2019 (2018: £7.7 million). 

Highlighted items during the year 
included the following: 

›	›	 £1.2 million for purchased intangible 

asset amortisation (2018: 
£1.2 million); 

›	›	 £0.1 million for share-based payment 

expenses (2018: £0.2 million); 

›	›	 £1.3 million for severance and 
reorganisation costs including 
Group management changes and 
the winding down of Stratigent in 
the USA (2018: £1.2 million);

›	›	 £6.8 million relating to the 

impairment of goodwill and 
intangibles of Stratigent and 
Digital Balance (2018: £2.6 million 
impairment was recognised in 
relation to China); 

›	›	 £0.9 million on the adoption of IFRS 
16 for the first time, relating to the 
capitalisation of onerous leases to 
the right-of-use asset;

›	›	 £0.5 million relating to the relocation 

of the London office;

›	›	 £0.3 million costs incurred for the 

loan facility refinancing; and

›	›	 £0.8 million credit in respect of 

adjustments to contingent deferred 
consideration relating to Digital 
Balance.

Taxation 
The underlying tax charge for the year 
for the continuing operations in 2019 
was £1.9 million (2018: £1.8 million). 
This is due to an under-provision of 
tax recognised in the current year, 
but relating to a prior year. 

The total tax charge including on 
highlighted items was £1.5 million, 
compared to £2.0 million in 2018. 

Earnings per share 
Underlying diluted earnings per share 
for 2019 was 3.6p (2018: 3.5p). There 
was a statutory diluted loss per share 
of 8.8p (2018: diluted loss per share 
of 6.4p). 

Dividend
Our Group is in a healthy financial 
position following the AdIntel sale and 
extension of bank borrowing facilities to 
2023. However, in view of the 
uncertainty created by the COVID-19 
outbreak and its impact on the global 
economy, the Board considers it prudent 
to conserve the Group’s cash resources 
during this time. It will therefore not be 
proposing the payment of a dividend in 
respect of 2019 at the forthcoming 
AGM, and will defer any dividend 
recommendation until economic and 
business conditions are more certain. 

Equity
During 2019, 1,002,436 shares were 
issued upon the exercise of employee 
share options. As a result, the number 
of shares in issue increased to 80,115,626 
(31 December 2018: 79,113,190).

Year ended  

Year ended  
  31 December   31 December  
2018  
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

5,657 

8,870 

6,167 

144% 

4,435

8,777

6,342

138%

Underlying cash from operations represents the cash flows from operations excluding the impact of highlighted items. 
The underlying net cash inflow from operations was £8.9 million during 2019 (2018: £8.8 million). 

Cash conversion was 144% in 2019 (2018: 138%) reflecting continued improvements in the management of working capital. 

12

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Net debt and banking facilities

Net cash  

Bank debt1   

Net debt1 

  31 December   31 December  
2018  
£’000 

2019  
£’000  

8,236 

6,414

(14,000) 

(34,000)

(5,764) 

(27,586)

1.  Bank debt in the statement of financial position includes £0.2 million (2018: £0.1 million) of loan arrangement fees that have been paid and which 

are amortised over the remaining life of the facility. The bank debt and net debt figures above exclude these costs. 

At the beginning of the year, the Group repaid £20.0 million of its borrowings on receipt of the proceeds from the AdIntel sale 
which completed on 2 January 2019. 

In September 2019, the Group refinanced its banking facilities with Barclays and Royal Bank of Scotland. The new committed 
facility comprises a revolving credit facility of £23.0 million, of which £14.0 million was drawn on refinance, and £1.0 million 
available as an overdraft. The facility has a maturity date of 20 September 2023. 

During the year, the Group continued to trade within the limits of its banking facilities and associated covenants. The covenants 
applying on a quarterly basis until June 2020 are based on EBITDA multiples as follows: interest cover >4.0; adjusted leverage 
<2.5; and adjusted deferred consideration leverage <3.0. In response to the COVID-19 disruption, modified covenants have been 
agreed with the lenders which will apply from July 2020 to May 2021. These will require the Group to maintain minimum liquidity 
of at least £5 million at the end of every month during that period. The covenants previously in force will apply again from June 
2021 onwards. 

Statement of financial position and net assets
A summary of the Group’s balance sheet as at 31 December 2019 and 31 December 2018 is set out below:

Goodwill and intangible assets  

Right-of-use asset1 

Other non-current assets 

Net asset held for sale2 

Net working capital 

Other current liabilities 

Lease liability1 

Other non-current liabilities 

Deferred consideration 

Net debt 

Net assets   

  31 December   31 December  
2018  
£’000 

2019 
£’000  

35,172 

8,339 

3,549 

— 

12,927 

(4,724) 

(9,590)  

(1,423) 

(14) 

43,251

—

2,149

23,418

11,258

(2,251)

—

(1,348)

(1,477)

(5,596) 

(27,486)

38,640 

47,514

1.  A right-of-use asset and corresponding lease liability were recognised in the year on adoption of IFRS 16 for the first time.

2.  The net asset held for sale in the prior year relates to net assets of the AdIntel business, the sale of which completed on 2 January 2019.

Net assets as at 31 December 2019 decreased by £8.9 million to £38.6 million (2018: £47.5 million). This principally reflects a 
£5.8 million reduction in goodwill and intangible assets through the impairment of goodwill in Stratigent, annual amortisation 
on the intangibles of £1.2 million and a £1.0 million reduction on adopting IFRS 16 for the first time. 

Alan Newman
Interim Chief Executive Officer/Chief Financial Officer

20 May 2020

13

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Client lifecycle

Our business model is built around our core capability 
of analysing media and marketing data to help our 
clients drive better marketing outcomes and in this 
way deliver greater business impact.

The client lifecycle

We help marketing leaders answer key questions across marketing activities.

1. Design 
future model

2. Manage  
and select 
partners

3. Define  
and align 
objectives

4. Evaluate 
outcomes

5. Optimise 
performance

Review compliance

›	›	 What are the 

›	›	 Are my 

›	›	 How do I 

right incentives, 
and against 
which KPIs?

›	›	 How do I align 
KPIs with 
marketing and 
business 
objectives?

partners and 
my teams 
delivering what 
they promised?

›	›	 Are my teams 
performing to 
expectation 
and targets?

improve and 
optimise my 
media and 
marketing 
performance?

›	›	 What solutions 
should I put in 
place to 
enhance return 
on investment?

Client questions:

›	›	 How do I 

organise for 
success, given 
new business 
and marketing 
requirements?

›	›	 Which partners 
should I work 
with in order to 
deliver on this 
vision?

›	›	 How do I best 
utilise existing 
partners?

Where Ebiquity helps: 

Desired outcomes: 

Organisational 
success

A best-in-class 
trusted  
ecosystem

Alignment with 
business  
objectives

Accountability for 
results

Higher  
marketing ROI

14

Ebiquity plc1. Designing a 
future model 
that’s fit for 
purpose 

We help advertisers to organise and structure their 
marketing organisation – in-house and also agency 
and technology partners – in a way that is most likely 
to deliver success in both the medium and the long term. 
The models we help to build are optimised, flexible, and 
designed to deliver on our clients’ business and marketing 
objectives.

The services we offer:
›	›	 Agency capability 

assessment and review

›	›	

In-housing assessment

›	›	 The Ebiquity media model

2. Managing 
and selecting 
agency 
partners

We work with advertisers to help them identify, select, 
on-board, and manage the right partners that can deliver 
the required capabilities and desired outcomes. These 
include the key relationship of the media agency of record, 
as well as advertising and marketing technology providers 
and other specialist agencies. This can also mean working 
smarter with existing partners.

The services we offer:
›	›	 Agency selection and 

management

›	›	 AdTech selection

›	›	 Contract review and 

negotiation (FirmDecisions)

3. Defining 
and aligning 
objectives

4. Evaluating 
outcomes

We help brands to make best use of their key partners 
and strategic relationships by helping them to align their 
marketing objectives and activities with their overall 
business objectives. This means helping CMOs to identify 
and set the right incentives for their partners and 
establish remuneration targets that reward 
against the delivery of meaningful KPIs.

The services we offer:
›	›	 KPI and target setting

›	›	 Agency remuneration

›	›	 Budget setting

By empowering our clients to compare outcomes with 
objectives, we enable them to develop and drive a culture 
of performance and accountability into their 
organisations. This allows them to assess whether their 
agency and technology partners – as well as their own 
internal teams – are delivering what they promised. 
Our data sets and analyses help advertisers to measure 
the outcomes of their media investments against their 
own targets and expectations and relevant benchmarks 
based on real spend data.

The services we offer:
›	›	 Media performance reviews

›	›	 Digital media KPI monitoring 

(Digital Decisions)

›	›	 Contract compliance 

reviews (FirmDecisions)

5. Optimising 
market 
performance

We partner with brands and their agency and technology 
providers to identify which levers they can pull to optimise 
a brand’s performance. High performance marketing 
analytics is the key to unlocking increased return on 
marketing investment. Our award-winning team of media 
and marketing analysts and econometricians help brands 
to improve performance of their media, marketing, and 
promotional spend, both long term and short term.

The services we offer:
›	›	 Econometrics and 

attribution

›	›	 Brand equity modelling

›	›	 Test and learn

15

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsEbiquity has two reporting segments –  
Media, and Analytics & Tech. 

Contract Compliance 
(branded as FirmDecisions) 
– supports advertisers by 
helping to ensure that 
agencies deliver services as 
contractually agreed, through 
reviews conducted by a team 
of experts. 

MarTech (branded Digital 
Balance) – assists brands to 
improve the effectiveness of 
their digital presence and 
provides a range of 
consulting, analytics, 
and optimisation services 
across a variety of website 
analytics platforms, including 
Google Analytics and Adobe. 

Media Management – 
advises clients on topics 
including management and 
selection of media agencies, 
setting media buying 
objectives, and the 
organisation of media 
functions. 

•  Case study: JLR

AdTech – helps brand owners 
to address the specific 
challenges of managing 
digital media and 
programmatic media trading 
by designing the data and 
technology ecosystem best 
suited to delivering their 
marketing strategy and 
optimising their digital 
media investments.

•  Case study: ExxonMobil

•  Case study: Vodafone

Media 

Media Performance 
(including Digital Decisions) 
– helps advertisers to monitor 
and evaluate their agencies’ 
media buying performance.

Analytics & Tech 

Advanced Analytics – 
helps advertisers to 
plan and optimise their 
investments in media and 
marketing, using analytical 
techniques to attribute and 
forecast the impact of 
marketing investments on 
business outcomes and to 
optimise these investments.

Over the next few pages, the leads 
of our different practices give their 
report cards for 2019.

16

Practice reviewsEbiquity plcMedia – Media Performance

In our Media Performance division, we help advertisers to 
monitor and evaluate their agencies’ media buying performance.

What makes Ebiquity 
Media Performance 
different?

We have the best data – the most 
extensive pool of media spend data 
of any consultancy worldwide – 
and we benchmark our clients’ media 
performance against competitors and 
peers. We also track agency 
performance guarantees to determine 
whether savings promised at pitch are 
in fact delivered. We are uniquely well 
placed to assess media and agency 
performance because we are 
independent of the media trading 
ecosystem and combine singular global 
processes with national, on-the-ground 
expertise in 15 leading markets.

How are you evolving your 
offer to meet client needs?

In the past couple of years, we have 
started to develop and roll out a Media 
Suite of tools that have standardised, 
automated, and accelerated our media 
performance consultancy around the 
world. These include EbiquityConnectTM, 
which validates and transfers data 
securely from agencies, and 
EbiquitySyncTM, which benchmarks 
digital media data and is specifically 
designed to deal with the complexities 
of digital.

What have been the 
business highlights 
for Ebiquity Media 
Performance in 2019?

Because we have now harmonised how 
we deliver digital media benchmarking 
across markets, we have started to 
provide this service to a growing 
number of global advertisers. 
The decision by Accenture to exit the 
media benchmarking market saw a 
number of major clients move to 
Ebiquity in 2019, a trend that looks 
set to accelerate in 2020.

Tell me about a couple 
of client highlights in 
the past year

In one case, we identified more than 
€7 million in media savings for a major 
advertiser resulting from agency errors 
in media performance calculations. 
In another, we welcomed back a client 
whose media performance was 17% 
below benchmark in the year it chose 
not to measure media performance; 
in the following year, performance 
improved by 9%.

Dietmar Kruse is Global Practice 
Principal for Media Performance. 
Based in our Hamburg office, 
Dietmar is responsible for driving 
revenue and profitability in the 
Media practice by innovating our 
service offering and driving 
efficiencies and automation 
in our data analysis.

How does your practice 
help clients?

We help brands understand where 
they stand relative to the market – 
competitors and peers – and show 
them how they can improve media 
performance. The two most important 
issues facing advertisers in media today 
are transparency of media performance 
and value erosion in media buying; all of 
the intermediaries between brands and 
publishers are taking a slice of 
their budget.

17

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsMedia – Digital Decisions

Digital Decisions provides a specialist digital 
media monitoring and optimisation service.

Tell me about a couple 
of client highlights in 
the past year

Our partnership with our flagship 
client, Heineken, has become 
ever-more important to us in the past 
year. Today, we collaborate right around 
the world with Heineken’s global media 
and procurement functions, local 
market leads, and global and local 
agency leadership. We are a true 
extension of their global team.

In 2019, we also launched two initiatives 
with our strategic partners at the World 
Federation of Advertisers: the Digital 
Media Benchmark, and Outlook 2020, 
an industry-wide view on how media 
prices are forecast to evolve, globally, 
in the year ahead. These initiatives have 
delivered both great momentum and 
thought leadership in the global 
media community.

What makes Digital 
Decisions different?

Using a methodology known as Robotic 
Process Automation, we extract the 
source data that identifies how digital 
media investments are performing 
automatically. Agencies no longer need 
to complete manual Excel templates, 
greatly improving both speed and 
accuracy. We deliver reporting and 
recommendations using scalable 
technologies such as Azure and 
Microsoft Power BI – not expensive 
and time-intensive PowerPoint. Both our 
back-end analytics and front-end user 
interface are fit for the new decade.

How are you evolving your 
offer to meet client needs?

We are committed to leading by 
example, deploying our methodologies 
and automation infrastructure across 
the Ebiquity family of companies. 
Digital Decisions is actively rolling out 
our service offer globally to top-tier, 
multinational clients. We are working 
in close partnership with Ebiquity’s 
network of global client partners, 
helping our clients to capitalise on the 
opportunities offered by digital media 
with data-driven certainty.

What have been the 
business highlights for 
Digital Decisions in 2019?

We are the global partner of Heineken, 
providing our services in 28 markets. 
We work in close partnership with 
clients including PepsiCo, KLM, and 
Three Mobile. We are actively and 
rapidly expanding our footprint across 
the Ebiquity global client network.

Ruben Schreurs is the founder 
of Digital Decisions, Ebiquity’s 
specialist digital media 
monitoring and optimisation 
service. He founded the business 
in 2017, acquired by Ebiquity in 
2020. Ruben is based in our 
New York City office, focused on 
driving growth in the US market.

How does your practice 
help clients?

Digital Decisions delivers best-in-class 
digital marketing consultancy advice 
and structural governance to global 
brands. Through our core Source Data 
Monitoring service, we provide a single 
global source of truth about digital 
media performance for global heads 
of media and marketing procurement 
leadership. Digital Decisions’ live and 
real-time business intelligence interface 
reports data and value to advertisers in 
an easy-to-manage format, enabling 
better decision-making on digital media 
investment strategy.

18

Ebiquity plcMedia – Media Management

In our Media Management division, we advise clients on topics 
including management and selection of media agencies, setting 
media buying objectives, and the organisation of media functions.

What makes Ebiquity 
Media Management 
different?

Ebiquity has a proven media 
framework created to enhance 
media management, from designing 
the optimal operating model to 
on-boarding new agency partners. 
We have a team of senior, dedicated, 
expert consultants who combine global 
experience with deep local knowledge. 
Our independence from the media 
trading ecosystem – as expressed in 
our Code of Conduct and Statement 
of Independence – means we can 
guarantee fair, robust, and 
best-practice consultancy advice 
that’s right for individual clients.

What have been the 
business highlights for 
Ebiquity Media 
Management in 2019?

We helped the leading global telecoms 
business, Vodafone, to find a new global 
media agency partner in more than 
20 markets, and also provided them 
with advisory services from our Tech 
practice. We also provided our Agency 
Capabilities Programme to luxury car 
manufacturer JLR, as well as delivering 
services from FirmDecisions, and our 
Analytics & Tech practices. Major new 
clients in 2019 included Beiersdorf 
(global), Lindt, and Boehringer 
Ingelheim in the US; and KFC, 
Richemont, and Burger King in 
major European markets.

How are you evolving your 
offer to meet client needs?

Ebiquity is well established as 
the leading global consultancy advising 
clients reviewing their media agencies 
of record; we advise around 100 major 
global and national advertisers each 
year using our market-leading Agency 
Selection Framework. We have recently 
extended this service to cover creative 
agencies, enabling advertisers to 
consolidate media and creative 
requirements within a single group. 
We have started to roll out globally 
EbiquitySelectTM, a new tool which 
analyses media offer data from 
agencies provided during pitches.

New services introduced in 2019 include 
an Agency Capabilities Programme 
which benchmarks incumbent agencies’ 
provision to determine whether they are 
the right partners for the long-term 
future. We have also launched an 
Organisation and Talent Trends report, 
an overview of the changing needs of 
employees globally and the what brands 
need to succeed in the future. This will 
be joined in 2020 by a new Operational 
Readiness tool to help advertisers build 
the optimal marketing strategy, and an 
Organisational Design service.

Tell me about a couple 
of client highlights in 
the past year

Providing our innovative Agency 
Capabilities Programme to JLR. 
See case study on page 20. 

Laetitia Zinetti is Global Media 
Management Practice Lead and 
MD of Continental Europe. 
Laetitia leads the team that 
advises clients on best practice in 
topics including agency partner 
selection, operating models, and 
remuneration. She is based in 
Ebiquity’s Paris office.

How does your practice 
help clients?

We help Chief Marketing Officers 
improve their media performance, 
by ensuring they have the best talent 
and capabilities in their organisations. 
We do this by putting the right 
processes and governance in place to 
drive growth. And we do this by helping 
them to select the right agency 
partners, set up to deliver against 
business and marketing objectives.

19

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsCase study

Agency Capabilities 
Programme

Client objectives

Ebiquity approach

Our impact

JLR undertook a lengthy global agency 
review after 17 years with its previous 
incumbent agency. Given challenging 
economic conditions, half-way into its 
new contract, the company wanted to 
assess what its agency was delivering 
to the business and understand whether 
they needed to review again.

We ran an in-depth review of agency 
performance, analysing the operational 
set-up, technical ecosystem, and 
delivery against contracted obligations. 
We assessed delivery against both the 
client’s business and marketing 
objectives.

Using both qualitative and quantitative 
performance metrics, we highlighted 
areas where agency delivery was 
beyond expectations and identified 
areas for improvement. This gave JLR 
the confidence to extend the agency 
contract and redirect their focus to 
other, business-critical projects.

20

Ebiquity plcContract Compliance – FirmDecisions

In our Contract Compliance division – branded as FirmDecisions – 
we support advertisers by helping to ensure that agencies deliver 
services as contractually agreed, through reviews conducted by a 
team of specialists.

What have been the 
business highlights for 
FirmDecisions in 2019?

Both Amazon and Sanofi started 
working with FirmDecisions in 2019. 
For both businesses, we were their 
first-ever contract compliance partner. 
Microsoft had been a longstanding 
client for many years, but they stopped 
auditing five years ago. But in 2019, 
we were delighted to welcome the tech 
giant back on board for an extensive 
programme of contract 
compliance reviews. 

What makes 
FirmDecisions different?

We have performed more than 7,000 
contract compliance reviews in more 
than 75 markets. All of our team are 
former agency, finance, or marketing 
procurement professionals with deep, 
specialist knowledge. Every day, we 
audit only media and marketing 
agencies. This specialism, experience, 
and focus provides expertise that 
generalist audit firms cannot.

How are you evolving your 
offer to meet client needs?

Our innovative Digital Deep Dive 
contract compliance reviews now 
provide advertisers with 
hitherto-unseen detail about the 
management and application of 
media-bought programmatically. 
FirmDecisions continually evolves 
its forensic approach to media 
transparency as new delivery and 
trading mechanisms are tested and 
introduced by agencies and service 
providers, including programmatic 
and digital-out-of-home, as well as 
influencer marketing.

The recent arrival of Digital Decisions 
into the Ebiquity family of companies 
and the growth of our Tech practice 
provides FirmDecisions with the 
opportunity and skills required to 
drill deeper into the challenges that 
advertisers are facing today in the 
increasingly digital marketing 
ecosystem. 

Stephen Broderick is the Global 
CEO and co-founder of 
FirmDecisions. FirmDecisions 
provides advertisers with 
transparency into their marketing 
and media investment, including 
creative, media, digital, and 
below-the-line. Stephen is 
based in our London office.

How does your practice 
help clients?

FirmDecisions provides advertisers 
with financial transparency into the 
marketing and media supply chain, 
gives clarity on how each marketing 
dollar is being spent, and verifies that 
agency partners are meeting their 
contractual obligations. As the 
marketing ecosystem becomes 
ever-more complex, advertisers are 
under increased pressure to ensure 
that marketing investment reaches 
target consumers as efficiently and 
effectively as possible.

21

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsAnalytics

In our Analytics practice, we help advertisers to plan and optimise their 
investments in media and marketing, using analytical techniques to 
attribute and forecast the impact of marketing investments on business 
outcomes and optimise these investments.

What makes Ebiquity 
Analytics different?

We adopt a strong, consulting-focused 
approach to put statistical disciplines to 
work for our clients. A major debate in 
the sector is how best to balance 
long-term, brand-focused messaging 
with short-term, conversion messaging. 
Our Analytics practice has a unique 
portfolio of modelling solutions to 
address this key question, including both 
Brand Equity Modelling and Attribution.

How are you evolving your 
offer to meet client needs?

Ebiquity has been increasing the 
penetration of market-leading 
optimisation technology to support 
our clients. This includes both our 
proprietary TestMatchTM software 
for test and learn programmes and 
PlanItTM to optimise promotional 
effectiveness in retail.

What have been the 
business highlights 
for Ebiquity Analytics 
in 2019?

We have started to expand the number 
of genuinely international assignments 
we run for multinationals, and in 2019 
we created a new team in France who 
are already delivering strong work on 
a number of clients including  
Air France/KLM and Cofidis. 
Other major client wins include 
BT Group and JLR.

Tell me about a couple 
of client highlights in 
the past year

In 2019, the Analytics practice won 
a record five awards at the biennial 
Institute of Practitioners in Advertising 
(‘IPA’) Effectiveness Awards for our 
clients, including Direct Line Group, Lidl, 
Weetabix, and Taylors of Harrogate.

Mike Campbell runs Ebiquity’s 
International Effectiveness 
Practice. The practice applies 
advanced analytics techniques 
to help brands optimise marketing 
investments across key marketing 
activities and markets. He is 
based in our London office.

How does your practice 
help clients?

We enable our clients to enhance 
the efficiency of all their marketing 
spend, typically improving the impact 
and return on investment of their media, 
promotions, and pricing strategies. 
We do this through a combination of 
both well-established and innovative 
analytics techniques, including 
econometrics, which is also known as 
market mix modelling.

22

Ebiquity plcAdTech

In our AdTech division, we help brand owners to address the specific 
challenges of managing digital media and programmatic media trading by 
designing the data and technology ecosystem best suited to delivering their 
marketing strategy and optimising their digital media investments.

2.  Use and control of marketing data. 
Data is the oil of the 21st century, 
and marketers who can leverage it 
better than their competitors can 
seize long-term competitive 
advantage. We help our clients in 
all areas related to marketing data, 
from strategic assessments of the 
status quo to setting up and working 
with new partners.

3.  Operational readiness. Just as 

FirmDecisions identifies areas for 
improvement in contract compliance, 
so the Tech practice helps brands 
improve all aspects of digital 
marketing operations.

What makes Ebiquity Tech 
different?

Our independence from the media 
supply chain is a critical differentiator. 
So too is our senior, experienced team 
who have many years’ proven 
operational experience running the very 
tools and technologies that our clients 
are moving into and where they need 
guidance. Ebiquity Tech is not a 
theoretical advisory practice like the 
management consultancies. We are 
experienced, hands-on practitioners.

How are you evolving your 
offer to meet client needs?

Throughout 2019, we continued to 
focus on developing our expertise in 
developing our end-to-end consultancy 
offer, from paid media all the way 
through to sales. A critical step forward 
has been deepening our experience 
across marketers’ creative agency 
workflows. In 2020, we are enhancing 
our offer to include implementation 
services.

What have been the 
business highlights for 
Ebiquity Tech in 2019?

We won the ExxonMobil business in the 
US in 2019, which has been renewed for 
2020 and extended in scope. We won 
our first piece of business for car 
manufacturer SEAT, strengthening 
our already-deep relationship with VW 
Group Marketing. And we won a global 
marketing transformation project for 
Beiersdorf’s global marketing team, 
who have charged us with developing 
their operating structure for media for 
the long-term future.

Tell me about a couple 
of client highlights in 
the past year

See the case study for ExxonMobil 
and Vodafone on pages 24 and 25.

Tim Hussain is Managing 
Principal of Ebiquity’s Tech 
Practice. He leads the Company’s 
global tech advisory business, 
helping brands to navigate 
the complexities of advertising 
and marketing technology. He is 
based in our London office.

How does your practice 
help clients?

Ebiquity’s Tech practice advises global 
brands in three principal areas relating 
to advertising and marketing 
technology (adtech and martech).

1.  Digital marketing transformation. 
We help advertisers on their own, 
three-to-five-year change 
management journeys of digital 
marketing transformation. 
This covers people, process, and 
technology. We have developed a 
streamlined and scalable approach 
for identifying business challenges 
and developing new opportunities.

23

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsCase study

Taking direct 
control of adtech

Client objectives

Ebiquity approach

Our impact

ExxonMobil wanted to take direct 
ownership of all its advertising 
technology contracts. The company 
was committed to this approach to 
secure efficiencies in its global 
digital marketing operation.

We supported Exxon’s senior 
marketing leadership team 
throughout this process. 
This included strategic council and 
education for Exxon executives on 
the level of savings and efficiencies 
that were achievable on Google and 
in other online properties.

Through our honest, open, and 
knowledgeable advice, we enabled 
ExxonMobil to secure initial 
operational efficiencies of more 
than $2 million. The senior 
leadership team now has the 
knowledge required to run its 
advertising technology contracts 
itself. The level of understanding 
and skill in the team – as well as 
the confidence to execute – 
has increased significantly.

“We thought in the pitch that you were deliberately trying to make it 
sound more complicated and nuanced than it was to justify getting 
more of the work. But we now know that there was a lot of 
important detail and considerations which we were not aware of.”

ExxonMobil 
marketing lead

24

Ebiquity plcStrategic report

Corporate governance

Financial statements

Case study

Taking digital media 
buying in-house

Client objectives

Ebiquity approach

Our impact

As one of the world’s largest 
telecommunications companies, 
Vodafone wanted help bringing much 
of its digital media buying in-house. 
The company also sought guidance on 
how reviewing its supplier chain could 
help to deliver its in-housing ambitions.

We designed a process that allowed 
Vodafone to be transparent about its 
in-housing goals and ask agencies to 
suggest how they would help them 
achieve this. The process enabled them 
to understand:

1.  The role they would play in 

Vodafone’s drive to in-housing.

2.  The commercial impacts 

Vodafone was looking to secure.

3.  How they could demonstrate 

their strategic and 
consultancy skills.

The process secured full co-operation 
for Vodafone from the agencies in the 
pitch process – including Dentsu Aegis 
which won the contract. It allowed 
agencies to approach remuneration in 
a completely new way and demonstrate 
capabilities beyond simply pricing.

25

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019People, community and environment

“Our ‘Recognise’ tool 

was launched globally, 
enabling staff at all 
levels to recognise each 
other for great work.”

Emma Winterson-Hayward

  Chief People Officer

People

As a consultancy business, people 
are key to the success of Ebiquity. 
The Group continues to put in place 
good employment practices and policies 
and develop a culture to attract, retain 
and develop the talent required to 
achieve the Company’s strategic 
objectives. Some of these are 
detailed below:

Learning and development
In 2019, we launched our ‘Consulting 
Skills Toolkit’ offering the opportunity 
to learn and develop skills in negotiation, 
storytelling with data, presentation 
skills, project management training, and 
PowerPoint across our offices. We will 
further define and develop this 
curriculum during 2020. Over 850 
training hours were received via this 
curriculum.

We launched our micro learning site 
SkillPill to all our offices, with an 80% 
adoption rate globally. The online app 
offers self-driven learning in 
management and leadership skills, 
change management, agile project 
management, innovation and strategy, 
amongst many others.

Wellbeing
Wellness Month continued in London 
with expert talks on resilience, sleep 
and managing stress, as well as 
massage sessions and wellbeing 
information. Germany also had their 
first Wellness Day.

Diversity
We solidified our approach to diversity 
with the launch of our diversity 
statement on all recruitment 
advertising, together with 
enhancements to our selection policies 
and processes to ensure we are 
delivering on this promise.

This year we announced our partnership 
with ‘Women in Data’. Women in Data 
provides a platform for female and 
gender diverse data professionals to 
share their technical knowledge and 
experiences, and to encourage a more 
diverse representation in the industry. 
A number of our staff attended their 
annual conference, at which we had an 
exhibitor stand, to network, share ideas 
and support greater gender diversity in 
the data industry.

The Company recognises the 
importance of its people to the success 
of the business. It also considers how it 
impacts the environment and the 
importance of giving back to 
the community.

26

Ebiquity plc 
An LGBT+ diversity group has been 
established in London. Its mission 
statement is to promote acceptance, 
education, respect, and equality 
throughout the Ebiquity Group and 
provide a safe and non-judgemental 
space as a support for the LGBT+ 
community, as well as providing 
advice, support, and education to 
the Ebiquity business. 

As a result of the diversity groups in 
2019, refinements have been made 
to flexible working policies and 
family leave.

Our ‘Insight On’ series in London 
continues with a variety of internal and 
external leaders from the most diverse 
backgrounds taking to the stage to 
share their career and life lessons.

People analytics
Data and insights capabilities were 
added to the People team in order to 
give the leadership team a deeper 
understanding of our people metrics 
and the impact and performance of 
our people strategies. 

Recognition
Our ‘Recognise’ tool was launched 
globally, enabling staff at all levels to 
recognise each other for great work in 
the following categories: innovation, 
leadership, client success, profile building 
for Ebiquity, new business, and just a 
general ‘thank you’ for great work done. 
It also enables the most senior leaders in 
the organisation to award an ‘Oscars’ 
badge for exceptional contributions. 
In the last quarter of 2019 over 300 
separate recognitions were sent, helping 
to foster a culture of great appreciation 
and celebration.

Community

Ebiquity recognises the importance of 
giving back to the communities in which 
it operates and making a positive 
contribution to society. World Child 
Cancer was selected as the global 
company charity via a voting process. 
World Child Cancer partner with 
healthcare professionals from high 
income countries to deliver services and 
support to children and the families of 
children with cancer in third world 
countries. So far, employees have raised 
over £11,000 through a variety of 
fundraising efforts, including sponsored 
spin, raffles, competitive sponsored 
events, and by charging staff to throw 
a cream pie in the face of a leader of 
their choice!

Environment

Ebiquity recognises the need to use 
resources prudently and aims to 
promote the maintenance of a healthy 
environment through responsible and 
sustainable consumption. During 2019 
the Company set up a sustainability 
group which is looking at ways in which 
we can act more responsibly and 
carefully towards the environment. 
This group has set a target of 
consistently reducing the Group’s 
carbon impact on an annual basis from 
a base year of 2019. As an office-based 
business, we look at the ways in which 
we work to try and minimise the impact 
we have on the environment. 
As a business we are:

›	›	 reducing air travel and making 

use of video and audio conference 
technology where possible;

›	›	 globally seeking to store and 
dispose of waste responsibly 
and recycle where possible;

›	›	 turning off monitors and other 
electronic equipment when not 
in use; and

›	›	 using recycled paper in printers 

and copiers.

Consulting 
skills toolkit 
launched

Over 850 training hours 
were received via this tool.

Supporting 
the 
community

Fundraising events held which 
raised over £11,000 for World 
Child Cancer charity.

27

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsSection 172 statement

Under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006, there is a general duty on 
every director to act in a way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its 
shareholders as a whole.

In doing this, the directors must have 
regard, amongst other matters, 
to the following:

›	›	 the likely consequences of 

any decision in the long term;

›	›	 the interests of the company’s 

employees;

›	›	 the need to foster the company’s 

business relationships with suppliers, 
customers and others;

›	›	 the impact of the company’s 
operations on the community 
and the environment;

›	›	 the desirability of the company 

maintaining a reputation for high 
standards of business conduct; and

›	›	 the need to act fairly as between 

members of the company.

Shareholders
The Company communicates with 
shareholders in a number of different 
ways. Following the publication of each 
of the Group’s interim results and 
preliminary results, the Chief Executive 
Officer and the Chief Financial Officer 
meet many of the major shareholders. 
The Chairman and Company Secretary 
also meet with major shareholders 
when appropriate. All shareholders 
are invited to the Company’s Annual 
General Meeting, and the Company’s 
website at www.ebiquity.com contains 
corporate documents and 
shareholder information.

Clients
Ebiquity strives to deliver relevant and 
professional services to its clients. 
We continue to evolve our services in 
line with changes in the media industry.

All client-facing staff put the client at 
the forefront in the delivery of services. 
The Chief Client Officer ensures that 
clients get the appropriate level of 
customer service and regularly reports 
to the Board on client relationships and 
issues facing clients.

28

Ebiquity’s own client forums
This year we have developed our own 
direct client forums, including a series 
of dinners on topics such as The Future 
of Media, Marketing in the next decade, 
and on the development of an Ebiquity 
Manifesto. We created an ‘Ebiquity 
Client Council’ composed of 15 senior 
brand owners which meets three times 
a year to discuss industry-critical issues 
and provide feedback and guidance on 
the development of our business. 
We also formed the ‘Ebiquity Media 
Management Procurement Forum’ to 
provide support and insight at regular 
meetings for our marketing 
procurement clients and contacts. 
These procurement forums will be 
developed in other markets going 
forward, with the Middle East and 
North Africa region already up 
and running. 

We also created a series of events 
bringing the client community into 
Ebiquity to highlight research we have 
conducted and exchange views on key 
topics such as managing brand safety 
online, cross media measurement and 
the future effectiveness of TV and 
end-to-end management of influencer 
marketing. The Ebiquity blog provides, 
thought leadership pieces, research 
and webinars on key industry issues 
and topics. 

We also partner with Mediatel on a key 
visioning conference – ‘The Future of 
Brands’ – which runs in London and 
Sydney and which attracts over 400 
high-level clients.

Employees
As set out on pages 26 and 27, 
the Company recognises that 
its employees are its key asset and 
engages them in decision-making. It is 
important that we continue to create 
the right environment to encourage 
and create opportunities for individuals 
and teams to realise their full potential.

All offices hold regular ‘Town Hall’ 
meetings to ensure employees are kept 
up to date on local and global financial 
targets and key matters affecting 
the Group. 

The Chief Executive Officer holds ‘all 
hands’ meetings where all employees 
can connect to a meeting held by video 
conference and hear an update from 
the Chief Executive Officer and are 
then invited to ask questions on any 
topic. They are held at different times 
of the day to ensure all global 
employees have the chance to attend.

Community and the environment
As set out on page 27, Ebiquity 
recognises it has a part to play in the 
maintenance of a healthy environment 
and the importance of giving back to 
the community.

Suppliers
Ebiquity aims to pay its suppliers within 
a reasonable period of their invoices 
being received and approved. Ebiquity 
Associates Limited (the Group’s UK 
trading company) reports its payment 
practices, policies, and performance 
under section 3 of the Small Business, 
Enterprise and Employment Act 2015. 

Trade bodies
Ebiquity has key formal strategic 
partnerships with advertiser trade 
bodies globally, including the WFA for 
global advertisers, ANA for US-based 
advertisers, and ISBA for UK-brand 
owners. We also work closely with 
similar bodies in many other markets 
from France to Australia.

The whole premise of these association 
relationships is to share key insights 
and trends and provide access for the 
advertiser community to Ebiquity’s 
deep sector expertise. Knowledge is 
shared via webinars, senior dinners, 
and association sector meetings. 
We also develop thought pieces 
and expert guidance, and provide 
one-on-one advice for association 
members on key marketing and 
media-related issues. 

We have published reports with the 
US and Canadian Associations of 
Advertisers and work closely with 
similar bodies globally.

Ebiquity plcRisks

As with all businesses, Ebiquity is exposed to a variety of risks. The Board 
recognises that commercial risks are an inherent part of business and that 
there needs to be an effective management of these risks in order to meet 
the Group’s strategic objectives and create shareholder return.

The Board has put in place an 
organisational structure with defined 
lines of responsibility and has adopted 
an authority matrix which sets out the 
delegation of authority to individual 
business units and members of staff. 
The internal control system is designed 
to provide reasonable assurance 
against material misstatement or loss. 

There is an internal risk committee 
which regularly meets to review 
existing risks and discuss new risks. 
The output of a bottom-up/top-down 
assessment of risks is fed into the Audit 
& Risk Committee of the Board. 
This includes details of the risk, 
the potential impact on the Group, 
mitigating actions that are required 
and progress against these actions.

The matters described below are not 
intended to be an exhaustive list of all 
possible risks and uncertainties, 
but highlights the key risks that the 
business faces and actions it takes 
to mitigate such risks.

Risk

Mitigating actions

COVID-19
The COVID-19 pandemic is affecting our clients’ businesses 
and may continue to do so. The extent of the disruption and 
the timing remains uncertain.

Different ways of working are required to deal with the 
measures imposed by COVID-19 and the safety of our staff 
becomes an enhanced risk. 

The Company has taken cost reduction measures to protect 
the business and preserve cash. This includes a temporary 20% 
salary reduction taken by the senior management team and 
the Board, a deferral of annual pay reviews and a temporary 
freeze on recruitment. We are also utilising the different 
government schemes that are available globally.

We had invested in technology and so are able to seamlessly 
work from home and planning is underway as to how the 
various offices can return when it is advisable to do so.

Staff retention and recruitment
Staff remain our greatest asset and the Group relies on 
skilled employees to build and maintain client relationships 
and win new business. The market is competitive and there 
is a risk we cannot attract and/or retain the best talent.

The Group’s People team seeks to recruit the best talent and 
to offer not only exciting work but a competitive remuneration 
package and to make the workplace a great place to be. 
Policies and processes are put in place to allow career 
progression and development.

Cyber security
The Company is aware of the increased threat of third 
parties seeking to attack the Group’s IT system, causing 
the loss or corruption of data.

The Remuneration Committee considers retention and 
motivation when considering the remuneration framework 
for executives.

During 2019, the Group created the new role of Information 
Security Officer, who has been upgrading the Groups’ cyber 
security capability. There has been investment in improving 
endpoint security, endpoint detection and response, patch 
management automation, and multi-layer authentication 
for remote users.

The Group’s IT function continues to monitor and improve the 
Group’s IT security in light of the continually evolving threat.

29

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsRisks continued

Risk

Mitigating actions

Client loss
There will always be a loss of some clients and new clients 
won. Losses may occur due to many events beyond our 
control, including the effect of other risks such as 
macroeconomic uncertainty, re-directing expenditure 
elsewhere, or a reduction in budget. 

The loss of a major client unexpectedly, however, 
could have a material impact on resourcing and revenue.

Misappropriation of assets/fraud
There is always the risk that fraudulent activity could take 
place by employees of the Group.

Dependency on media agencies
Ebiquity has a unique relationship with media agencies. 
In order to carry out its services for clients, it requires 
co-operation from the media agencies to provide clients’ 
data to Ebiquity in a timely and suitable format. There is 
a risk that media agencies do not co-operate with Ebiquity 
and try and frustrate the relationship it has with clients. 

Macroeconomic uncertainty, including Brexit
As well as the macroeconomic uncertainty from 
COVID-19, there could be volatility in markets following 
Brexit. This could lead to downward pressure on budgets. 

Consistently providing high-quality work and getting 
regular feedback from clients helps maintain strong client 
relationships. The Company continues to develop its ‘Client 
Partner’ group where senior consultants work alongside the 
client to ensure consistency of work and to expand the types 
of services the client takes from the Group. 

The Group puts in place good policies and procedures to ensure 
the segregation of duties and has an authority matrix setting 
out levels of authority. Bribery and anti-corruption training 
regularly takes place and an annual external audit provides 
comfort that this sort of behaviour is not taking place.

Ebiquity continues to try and build good and transparent 
working relationships with the media agencies. Standard 
NDAs are now in place with many of the major media agency 
groups, together with a ‘code of conduct’ or ‘ways of working’ 
document to ensure that both parties work in a fair and open 
way. The Group’s CEO and other senior executives meet 
counterparts at the media agencies to share any issues or 
concerns that arise in the course of Ebiquity providing services 
to mutual clients.

The impact of this is likely to vary by sector and geography. 
Our client base is across different sectors and geographies 
which should help limit the risk. Regular client feedback is 
sought to understand any impact on our clients. We continue 
to keep a tight control on our costs and have taken measures 
to preserve cash.

30

Ebiquity plcStrategic report

Corporate governance

Financial statements

Corporate governance

What’s in this section

This section provides information on how  
the Company is governed and the activities  
of the Board.

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance report 

Audit & Risk Committee report 

Remuneration Committee report 

Directors’ report 

32

34

40

43

49

strong 
leadership

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019

31

The Board of Directors (the ‘Board’) has overall responsibility for the Group 
and aims to represent the interests of shareholders and provide leadership 
and control in order to ensure the growth and development of the business.

About
Rob joined the Board as a 
Non-Executive Director on 
1 March 2018 and was appointed 
Chairman on 9 May 2018. 
Rob currently sits on the 
Remuneration Committee, the Audit 
& Risk Committee, and is Chair of the 
Nomination Committee.

About
Alan was appointed to the Board 
as Chief Financial Officer on 
7 January 2019. On 12 November 2019, 
Alan was appointed Interim Chief 
Executive Officer after Michael Karg 
stepped down from the role. 

About
Richard was appointed to the 
Board on 1 November 2008, 
is Chairman of Ebiquity’s Audit 
& Risk Committee and also sits 
on the Nomination Committee. 

Experience 
Prior to joining Ebiquity, Rob was CEO of STV Group 
plc for nearly 11 years, where he led their successful 
transformation into a pre-eminent digital media 
group and oversaw a dramatic increase in 
shareholder value. Prior to STV, Rob was 
Commercial Director at Channel 4 Television for four 
years and was previously a Managing Director with 
UBS Corporate Finance and the lead partner for 
Deloitte’s TMT Industry Group in Europe. He is 
currently Chairman of the AIM-listed data services 
provider Blancco Technology Group plc and 
Chairman of the Met Office.

Experience 
Alan has extensive public company experience, 
having spent almost 10 years as CFO of YouGov plc, 
the AIM-listed global market research and data 
analytics group. He is currently a Non-Executive 
Director of Future plc, Chair of Freud Museum 
London and Director of the Quoted Companies 
Alliance. Prior to YouGov plc, Alan was a partner 
at EY and previously at KPMG, where he provided 
Board-level advisory and consulting services 
specialising in the media, technology and telecoms 
sectors. He is a chartered accountant and has an 
MA in Modern Languages (French and Spanish) 
from Cambridge University. 

Experience 
Richard was CEO of Instinctif Partners, the 
international business communications consultancy, 
for 12 years from 2006 to 2018. He subsequently 
held the role of Deputy Chairman of Instinctif 
Partners until September 2019. He is currently 
Chairman of the Harpenden Trust. Prior to joining 
Instinctif Partners, Richard was Chief Executive of 
Huntsworth plc, following the merger with Incepta 
Group plc, where he was the Chief Executive and 
formerly Group Finance Director. An economics 
graduate from Cambridge University, Richard 
subsequently qualified as a chartered accountant 
with Price Waterhouse (now PwC) in London. 

Rob Woodward
Non-Executive Chairman

Alan Newman
Interim Group Chief 
Executive Officer and 
Chief Financial Officer

Richard Nichols
Non-Executive Director

Key

  Audit & Risk Committee 

  Nomination Committee 

  Remuneration Committee 

  Denotes Chairperson

32

Board of DirectorsEbiquity plcAbout
Julie was appointed to the Board 
on 21 November 2014, is Chair 
of Ebiquity’s Remuneration 
Committee and sits on the 
Nomination Committee.

About
Tom was appointed to the Board 
on 21 November 2014 and sits on 
Ebiquity’s Nomination Committee, 
Remuneration Committee, and Audit 
& Risk Committee.

About
Mark joined Ebiquity as General 
Counsel and Company Secretary 
in May 2017.

Experience 
Julie has served in both executive and non-executive 
capacities on the boards of leading companies in the 
FTSE 100 and FTSE 250, as well as a number of 
major public sector organisations. She has chaired 
the remuneration committees of several company 
boards and served as Chair of Harvey Nash plc from 
2013 to 2018. She is currently Senior Independent 
Director of Marshall of Cambridge, a director of 
Chrysalis VCT plc and Chair of the Steering Group 
of Chapter Zero. Julie has broad experience of 
businesses in professional services such as Ebiquity, 
and of those in the consumer industry sectors 
Ebiquity serves, including The Woolwich, Camelot 
and Greggs. She was Associate Fellow at Oxford 
University Said Business School from 2000 to 2010, 
having previously run a global team as a partner 
at Accenture. 

Experience 
Following senior sales positions with Telia and BT 
Cellnet, Tom founded Virgin Mobile in 1999 and 
subsequently built the business to revenues of 
£1 billion and 4.3 million customers in eight years. 
He led the company’s IPO in 2004 and eventual sale 
to NTL in 2006. From 2007 he was Chief Executive 
Officer of Orange, leading its turnaround and 
subsequent successful merger in 2010 with T-Mobile 
to create Everything Everywhere (‘EE’). After 
running EE for a further year, he left to pursue 
private equity opportunities and non-executive roles. 
Tom brings a wealth of international business 
experience and consumer instinct to Ebiquity. 

Experience 
Having qualified as a solicitor at Eversheds, Mark 
worked in their Corporate team before moving to 
his first in-house role at Premier Farnell plc. In 2003 
Mark joined the global digital communications group 
Next Fifteen Communications Group plc as General 
Counsel and Company Secretary, looking after the 
legal function and providing company secretarial 
and corporate governance support to the Board. 
In 2009 he set up his own boutique law firm, Baker 
Sanford LLP, while continuing to provide an 
outsourced legal and company secretarial service 
to Next Fifteen, including acting for the company 
on acquisitions made between 2009 and 2015. 

Julie Baddeley
Non-Executive Director

Tom Alexander
Non-Executive Director

Mark Sanford
Company Secretary

33

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsCorporate governance report

“The Board recognises 

that shareholders look 
to the Board to promote 
the long-term success of 
the Company.”

Rob Woodward

  Non-Executive Chairman

Chairman’s governance overview
I am pleased to introduce the corporate 
governance report for the year ended 
31 December 2019. 

It is my principal responsibility as 
Chairman to ensure that the Board is 
effective in interrogating, approving 
and monitoring the Company’s 
direction and strategy and for the 
governance of the Group. I am also 
responsible, in consultation with the 
Company Secretary, for ensuring 
proper information is supplied to the 
Board in a timely fashion, that Board 
meetings are conducted effectively 
and that proper debate is had at 
Board meetings. 

The Board recognises that shareholders 
look to the Board to promote the 
long-term success of the Company and 
I recognise that effective governance is 
crucial to achieve this. As Chairman it is 
my role to provide the leadership to the 
Board to do so. 

The corporate governance report 
describes the framework for corporate 
governance and internal control that 
the Directors have established. 
Ebiquity is committed to robust 
standards of corporate governance 
which are appropriate to the nature 
and size of the business and the values 
of our business.

In July 2018 the Board formally 
adopted the Quoted Companies 
Alliance Corporate Governance Code 
(the ‘QCA Code’) pursuant to Rule 26 of 
the AIM Rules. The Board believes that 
the QCA Code is appropriate for the 
Company and further details can be 
found on pages 38 and 39 where 
compliance with the various principles 
of the QCA Code is set out. As an 
AIM-listed company, the Company is 
not required to comply with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the ‘UK 
Code’), however the Board does 
consider the principles and provisions 
of the UK Code when it considers it 
appropriate and relevant.

Rob Woodward 
Chairman

20 May 2020

Board attendance:

Rob Woodward  

Michael Karg, PhD  
(until 12 November 2019)  

Alan Newman  

Richard Nichols  

Julie Baddeley  

Tom Alexander  

9/9

5/5

7/7

9/9

9/9

9/9

34

Ebiquity plc 
Statement of compliance
Ebiquity has adopted the QCA Code 
and is compliant with its principles. 
Further details are set out on pages 
38 and 39.

Board of Directors
Role of the Board
The Board is responsible to 
shareholders for the strategic direction, 
investment decisions and proper 
management of the affairs of the 
Group. The Directors are also 
collectively responsible for acting in the 
way which they consider, in good faith, 
is most likely to promote the success of 
the Company for the benefit of 
Ebiquity’s shareholders as a whole. 
In doing so, the Directors have regard 
(amongst other matters) to the 
interests of the Company’s employees 
and the need to foster the Company’s 
business relationships with suppliers, 
customers, and other stakeholders.

A statement of the Directors’ 
responsibilities with regard to the 
annual report and financial statements 
is set out on page 53.

Composition of the Board  
and roles of the Directors
The changes to the Board composition 
during the year were as follows:

Kevin McNair stepped down as Interim 
Chief Financial Officer on 7 January 
2019 as Alan Newman was appointed 
Chief Financial Officer on that date. 
Following Michael Karg’s resignation as 
Director and Chief Executive Officer on 
12 November 2019, Alan also took on 
the role of Interim Chief Executive 
Officer. 

Morag Blazey resigned from the Board 
on 2 January 2019. Morag had been 
Managing Principal of the Advertising 
Intelligence Practice since 2016 and 
transferred to Nielsen as part of the 
sale of the business which completed 
on 2 January 2019.

Gender diversity

Tenure

1

4

Women

Men

The Board of Directors now comprises 
an independent Non-Executive 
Chairman, three further independent 
Non-Executive Directors and one 
Executive Director. Nick Waters has 
been appointed as Chief Executive 
Officer with effect from 1 July 2020. 
The Board is satisfied that it has a 
suitable balance of independence, 
skills and knowledge to enable it to 
discharge its duties and responsibilities 
effectively. The three Non-Executive 
Directors are all considered to be 
independent and no single director 
is dominant in the decision-making 
process. 

The Chairman’s principal role is to lead 
the Board in the determination of its 
direction and strategy. The Chairman is 
responsible for setting the agenda for, 
and organising the business of, 
the Board as well as ensuring its 
effectiveness. The Chief Executive 
Officer is responsible for setting 
long-term strategy, developing 
appropriate business plans, agreeing 
management KPIs and leading the 
Executive Directors and senior 
executive team in the day-to-day 
running of the Group’s business. 
He is also responsible for shareholder 
communications and ongoing 
relationships with investors. The Chief 
Executive Officer and the Chief 
Financial Officer regularly meet with 
investors and analysts to discuss the 
performance of the business and its 
strategy.

2

1

2

1–3 years

4–8 years

9+ years

Appointment, election and 
re-election of Directors
The Company’s Articles of Association 
provide that at each AGM of the 
Company, one-third of the Directors 
must retire by rotation. At the 
forthcoming AGM, Rob Woodward and 
Richard Nichols will offer themselves 
for re-election by shareholders.

With regard to both Rob Woodward 
and Richard Nichols, the Board is 
satisfied that their contributions 
continue to be effective and they 
demonstrate sufficient time 
commitment to their roles. The Board 
also believes that each director 
standing is independent in character 
and judgement. The Board 
acknowledges that Richard Nichols 
reached 11 years’ tenure as a 
Non-Executive Director in 
November 2019. After evaluation, 
the Board has determined that Richard 
remains independent in character and 
judgement in his role as Non-Executive 
Director. If Richard Nichols continues on 
the Board, it will be the Board’s 
intention to seek re-election annually, 
consistent with the QCA Code.

Biographical details regarding the 
Directors, including the committees 
on which they serve, are contained on 
pages 32 and 33.

35

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsCorporate governance report continued

Board of Directors

Chairman

Rob Woodward 
Non-Executive Chairman

Executive 
Director

Non-
Executive 
Directors

Alan Newman 
Interim Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer

Richard Nichols 
Non-Executive 
Director

Julie Baddeley 
Non-Executive 
Director

Tom Alexander 
Non-Executive 
Director

Board committees

Audit & Risk  
Committee

Nomination  
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

2019 membership

2019 membership

2019 membership

Richard Nichols (Chair)

Rob Woodward (Chair)

Julie Baddeley (Chair)

Rob Woodward

Richard Nichols

Rob Woodward

Tom Alexander

Julie Baddeley

Tom Alexander

Tom Alexander

Board committees
The Board has constituted several 
committees to support it in the 
performance of its functions. 
The principal committees are the 
Audit & Risk Committee, the 
Remuneration Committee and the 
Nomination Committee. The reports 
of these committees can be found on 
pages 40 to 48.

The Company Secretary acts as 
secretary to the committees. The terms 
of reference of each committee are 
available on the Group’s website and 
are reviewed regularly and updated as 
required. 

Advisers to the Board  
and its committees
All Directors have access to the advice 
of the General Counsel and Company 
Secretary, who attends all Board 
meetings. The Board seeks advice from 
external advisers, including legal, tax, 
and remuneration advisers, on various 
matters as and when appropriate. 
The Company’s auditors, 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, 
attend meetings of the Audit & Risk 
Committee. Directors may take 
independent professional advice at 
the Company’s expense as and when 
necessary to support the performance 
of their duties as directors of the 
Company.

Risk management
The Company’s approach to risk is 
set out on pages 29 and 30. 

The Board’s responsibilities
The principal matters considered by 
the Board include:

›	›	 approving the annual budget 
and quarterly reforecasts;

›	›	 the Company’s strategy, 
performance and outlook;

›	›	 review of the Group’s risk 

management and internal controls;

›	›	 the Group’s financial results 
for the half year and full year;

›	›	 approving the Company’s 

dividend policy;

›	›	 major capital projects; and

›	›	 corporate governance matters 
including QCA Code compliance.

As part of good governance, there 
are certain matters which are not 
appropriate to be delegated to 
management and should be reserved 
for consideration by the Board. 
The Board has formally approved a 
written list of such matters, which 
is available on Ebiquity’s website 
at www.ebiquity.com. 

Board meetings
During the year the Board met formally 
face-to-face on seven occasions. 
In addition, there were two further 
Board meetings of the Non-Executive 
Directors held by telephone. 

The Board receives monthly 
management accounts and other 
relevant information as appropriate 
in advance of each Board meeting. 
This information is made available 
electronically via an online Board 
portal. Directors are able to access 
this information at any time, including 
following Board meetings.

There are a number of standing agenda 
items reviewed by the Board at each 
regular Board meeting, including a CEO 
update, a CFO update and a Company 
Secretary update. Monthly 
management accounts are shared with 
the Board. Other items are considered 
by the Board as appropriate, including, 
as a minimum, an annual review of the 
Company’s governance arrangements. 

Detailed minutes are taken of all Board 
meetings. Minutes are circulated to the 
Board and approved at the following 
Board meeting.

36

Ebiquity plcShareholders
The Board recognises the importance 
of effective communication with its 
shareholders, to ensure that its 
strategy and performance are 
clearly understood. The Company 
communicates with shareholders 
through the annual report and 
financial statements, full-year and 
half-year results announcements, 
trading updates, the AGM, and 
face-to-face meetings. 

A range of corporate information 
(including copies of presentations 
and announcements) is available 
on the Company’s website at  
www.ebiquity.com. The Chief Executive 
Officer, Chief Financial Officer and the 
Chairman regularly meet with 
institutional shareholders and the 
Board is kept informed of the views 
of the major shareholders.

Whistle-blowing and  
the Bribery Act 2010
The Company has established 
arrangements by which individuals 
may, in confidence, raise concerns 
about possible improprieties in 
matters of financial reporting and 
other matters. The Group has an 
anti-bribery code of conduct which is 
intended to extend to all the Group’s 
business dealings and transactions in 
all countries in which it or its 
subsidiaries and associates operate.

Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee is chaired 
by Rob Woodward. The Nomination 
Committee currently comprises 
Rob Woodward, Richard Nichols, 
Julie Baddeley, and Alan Newman. 
The Nomination Committee meets as 
necessary and has responsibility for 
nominating candidates to the Board 
for appointment as directors, bearing 
in mind the need for diversity and a 
broad representation of skills across 
the Board.

Board evaluation 
The Chairman, in conjunction with the 
Company Secretary, takes on the role 
of organising an annual Board 
evaluation programme. The Company 
Secretary also conducts an evaluation 
of the Chairman’s performance. 
Feedback is obtained and shared, 
which leads to actions to be taken to 
continuously improve the functioning 
of the Board. All Directors complete a 
questionnaire on the structure and the 
performance of the Board and its 
committees which is sent anonymously 
to the Company Secretary who collates 
the scores and comments. The Board 
discusses the outcome of the 
questionnaire and what actions need 
to take place as a consequence. 

Directors’ conflicts of interest
Directors have a statutory duty to 
avoid conflicts of interest with the 
Company. The Company Secretary 
keeps a register of the Directors’ other 
interests and potential conflicts which 
is constantly kept up to date. At the 
beginning of each Board meeting the 
Directors confirm they have no 
conflicts of interest in relation to 
the matters being considered.

Audit & Risk Committee
The Audit & Risk Committee currently 
comprises Richard Nichols (Chair), 
Rob Woodward, and Tom Alexander. 
The Board considers Richard Nichols 
to have recent and relevant financial 
experience to chair the Committee. 
Richard is a qualified chartered 
accountant and has served as the 
finance director and chief executive 
officer of listed and private companies. 
The Chief Financial Officer also 
attends most meetings at the 
invitation of the Chair. The purpose of 
the Audit & Risk Committee is to ensure 
the preservation of good financial 
practices throughout the Group; to 
monitor that controls are in force to 
ensure the integrity of financial 
information; to review the interim and 
annual financial statements; to assess 
the adequacy and effectiveness of the 
Company’s risk management systems 
and consider the Group’s risks; and to 
provide a line of communication 
between the Board and the 
external auditors.

Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee 
currently comprises Julie Baddeley 
(Chair), Rob Woodward, and 
Tom Alexander. The Executive Directors 
attend the meetings on the invitation 
of the Chair but will not be present for 
any discussions regarding their own 
remuneration. The Remuneration 
Committee is responsible for the 
Executive Directors’ remuneration 
and other benefits and terms of 
employment, including 
performance-related bonuses 
and share options, as well as general 
guidance on aspects of remuneration.

Nomination Committee 
attendance:

Rob Woodward  

Richard Nichols  

Julie Baddeley 

Tom Alexander  

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/1

37

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsCorporate governance report continued

The Company formally adopted the Quoted Companies Alliance 
Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’) on 23 July 2018, 
pursuant to Rule 26 of the AIM Rules.

The main principles of the Code are set out below together with, in broad terms, how Ebiquity complies with these principles.

Principle 1

Establish a strategy and business model which promote long-term value for shareholders

Further details of the Company’s business model and strategy are set out on pages 02 to 30.

Principle 2

Seek to understand and meet shareholder needs and expectations

As set out in this corporate governance report, the Directors actively seek to build a relationship with 
shareholders. The Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer are responsible for shareholder 
liaison and present to the major shareholders and analysts after the publication of both the interim 
results and the full-year preliminary results. As well as a presentation of the results, the meetings give 
shareholders the opportunity to ask any questions and discuss their needs and expectations. The 
Chairman and the Company Secretary also meet with major shareholders as required. Ad-hoc meetings 
are welcomed by the Directors as and when the need arises. The AGM is an opportunity for all 
shareholders to meet the Board and ask any questions.

Principle 3

Take into account wider stakeholder and social responsibilities and their implications for 
long-term success

In addition to shareholders, clients, suppliers, trade bodies and employees are the key stakeholders. 

The Company recognises that employees are key to its success. Further details on the Company’s 
engagement with its employees are set out on pages 26 and 27, and the section 172 statement on page 
28 details engagement with other stakeholders.

Principle 4

Embed effective risk management, considering both opportunities and threats, 
throughout the organisation

The Board retains ultimate control and responsibility for the risk management of the Group. 
The risk management approach adopted by the Board is set out on pages 29 and 30. 

Principle 5

Maintain the Board as a well-functioning, balanced team led by the Chair

The Board comprises an independent Non-Executive Chairman, three independent Non-Executive 
Directors and currently one full-time Executive Director. Nick Waters has been appointed as Chief 
Executive Officer with effect from 1 July 2020. All Non-Executive Directors are engaged via letters of 
appointment which state their time commitment. Non-Executive Directors are required to commit an 
average of 12 days per year, including attending Board and committee meetings, the AGM, meetings with 
shareholders and Board evaluation. The Chairman commits to four days per month carrying out his role. 
Further details about the number of Board meetings held during the year and attendance at such 
meetings are set out on page 34. 

Principle 6

Ensure that between them the Directors have the necessary up-to-date experience, 
skills and capabilities

The Board is satisfied that it has an appropriate mix of skills and experience. The Non-Executive 
Directors have worked in a variety of industries in different roles and bring valuable knowledge 
and insight. The Directors have finance, consulting, media and senior management skills. Two of 
the Non-Executive Directors (plus the Chairman) are male and one is female. Biographies for each 
of the Directors are set out on pages 32 and 33.

All Directors receive timely information in advance of Board meetings and receive management 
accounts regularly. The Directors have direct access to the services of the General Counsel and 
Company Secretary and take external independent advice where required.

38

Ebiquity plcPrinciple 7

Evaluate Board performance based on clear and relevant objectives,  
seeking continuous improvement

The Chairman, in conjunction with the Company Secretary, takes on the role of organising an annual 
Board evaluation programme. The Company Secretary also conducts an evaluation of the Chairman’s 
performance. Feedback is obtained and shared, which leads to actions to be taken to continuously 
improve the functioning of the Board. For the year ending 31 December 2019, all Directors completed 
a questionnaire on the structure and the performance of the Board and its committees. This was sent 
anonymously to the Company Secretary who collated the scores and comments. The Board discussed 
the outcome of the questionnaire and a set of actions has been put in place to address issues raised. 

Principle 8

Promote a corporate culture that is based on ethical values and behaviours

The Company ensures that policies and procedures are in place to cover matters such as anti-bribery and 
corruption, business ethics, and modern slavery. The Company commissioned a diversity report and has a 
number of diversity working groups to ensure it functions as a diverse organisation. The regular ‘all hands’ 
web-based meetings, open to all employees, encourages open and honest discussions.

The Company’s core values of Clear, Agile, Curious, and Objective encourage a straight-forward, 
adaptable, honest culture which helps promote ethical values and behaviours.

Principle 9

Maintain governance structures and processes that are fit for purpose and support good 
decision-making by the Board

The Board is responsible to shareholders for the strategic direction and proper management of the 
affairs of the Group. The Directors are collectively responsible for acting in a way which they consider 
is most likely to promote the success of the Company for the benefit of shareholders.

The roles of the Directors are set out on page 35.

The Board has constituted several committees to help it in the performance of its functions. The principal 
committees are the Audit & Risk Committee, the Remuneration Committee and the Nomination 
Committee. Full terms of reference are published on the Company’s website (www.ebiquity.com) 
and the principal responsibilities are set out on page 37. 

As part of good corporate governance there are certain matters which are not appropriate to be 
delegated to management and should be reserved for consideration by the Board as a whole. The full 
list of such matters is available on the Company’s website (www.ebiquity.com) and they include:

		•• approving annual budgets and quarterly forecasts;

		••

changes to the Group’s capital structure;

		•• approving the dividend policy; and 

		••

reviewing non-routine regulatory news service announcements made by the Company.

Principle 10

Communicate how the Company is governed and is performing by maintaining a 
dialogue with shareholders and other relevant stakeholders

The Company communicates with shareholders through its annual report and accounts, the Annual 
General Meeting, face-to-face meetings with major shareholders and results presentations. A range 
of corporate information (including all regulatory announcements and annual reports and accounts) 
is available to all shareholders and stakeholders on the Company’s website at www.ebiquity.com. 

The website also contains details of all votes cast by shareholders at its Annual General Meeting and this 
is also set out in an announcement after the meeting.

39

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsAudit & Risk Committee report

“The Board has 

delegated to the 
Audit & Risk Committee 
oversight of the Group’s 
financial reporting 
and the Group’s risk 
management process.”

Richard Nichols

  Audit & Risk Committee Chair 

Introduction
I am pleased to present the report 
of the Audit & Risk Committee 
(the ‘Committee’) for the year ended 
31 December 2019. This report details 
the Committee’s role and 
responsibilities and key activities during 
the year. Although the Board has 
ultimate responsibility for the Group’s 
system of internal control and for 
managing the Group’s risks, the Board 
has delegated to the Audit & Risk 
Committee oversight of the Group’s 
financial reporting and the Group’s risk 
management process which aims to 
identify and mitigate significant risks. 

Richard Nichols
Audit & Risk Committee Chair 

20 May 2020

Composition of the 
Audit & Risk Committee
All of the members of the Committee 
are independent Non-Executive 
Directors with a combination of 
accounting, financial and commercial 
experience. The Board considers 
Richard Nichols, who chairs the 
Committee, to have recent and 
relevant financial experience. Richard is 
a chartered accountant with significant 
financial and commercial experience in 
both listed and unquoted companies. 
Richard’s biography and appointments 
are set out on page 32.

The Committee met on three occasions 
during the year. The attendance of its 
members is set out in the table on 
page 40. Meetings of the Committee 
are commonly comprised of three 
sections. The first section of meetings 
of the Committee are also normally 
attended by the Group Chief Executive 
Officer, the Chief Financial Officer, the 
Company Secretary and other 
members of senior management, 
together with representatives from the 
external auditors, 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (‘PwC’), 
which ensures the Committee and the 
external auditors have access to all 
financial and operational knowledge. 

Committee attendance:

Rob Woodward  

Richard Nichols  

Tom Alexander  

3/3

3/3

3/3

40

Ebiquity plc 
Subsequently, Committee members 
also meet with the external auditors 
without the Executive Directors and 
other senior management in 
attendance, which ensures that the 
Committee maintains an independent 
view. Finally, there is a section of the 
meeting attended solely by the 
members of the Committee.

Role and responsibilities of  
the Audit & Risk Committee
The Committee’s terms of reference 
can be found on the Company’s 
website. The principal responsibilities 
of the Committee include:

›	›	 monitoring the integrity of the 
Group’s financial statements, 
including a review of significant 
financial reporting issues and 
judgements;

›	›	 considering the Group’s accounting 
policies and practices and the 
application of accounting standards;

›	›	 overseeing the relationship with the 

Group’s external auditors and 
reviewing the external auditors’ 
independence and objectivity, the 
effectiveness of the external audit 
process and the appointment, 
reappointment and removal of 
the external auditors;

›	›	 reviewing the Group’s financial 

controls and other internal reporting 
systems;

›	›	 reviewing progress on implementing 

control improvements; and

›	›	 keeping under review the adequacy 
and effectiveness of the Company’s 
risk management systems. Further 
information on the Group’s approach 
to risk is set out on pages 29 and 30.

Activities during the year
The key matters the Committee 
considered during the year are 
listed below.

In respect of the Group’s financial 
statements and interim accounts:

›	›	 the assessment of the carrying value 
of goodwill and intangible assets: 
the Committee assesses on a 
twice-yearly basis whether there 
are any indicators of impairment 
to the carrying value of any 
cash-generating unit. The 
Committee reviewed the key 
assumptions in the assessment of 
goodwill and the sensitivity of these 
assumptions and impact on the 
carrying value of goodwill and 
intangible assets. On this basis the 
Committee makes recommendations 
to the Board in this regard;

›	›	 revenue recognition: the Committee 
reviewed the quantum of accrued/
deferred income and the judgement 
applied by management in 
calculating revenue recognition 
cut-off. The Committee reviewed 
the quality of evidence available to 
support revenue recognition;

›	›	 presentation and disclosure of 

highlighted items: the Committee 
reviewed the nature and quantum of 
the items proposed by management 
to be classified as highlighted, 
to ensure they were consistent with 
the Group’s accounting policies and 
to ensure full disclosure had been 
made in the financial statements;

›	›	 capitalisation of intangibles: 

the Committee reviewed the nature 
and quantum of the system 
development costs proposed by 
management to be capitalised, 
together with the period over which 
the capitalised items will be 
amortised, to ensure they are 
consistent with the Group’s 
accounting policies;

›	›	

impact of IFRS 16: the Committee 
reviewed the impact and adoption 
of the new IFRS 16 accounting 
standard;

›	›	 taxation: the Committee reviewed 
the significant components of the 
tax charge and provision and the 
overall effective tax rate of the 
Group as a whole; and

›	›	 going concern: in accordance with 

the guidance issued by the Financial 
Reporting Council, the Committee 
reviewed the specific consideration 
made by the Directors to the 
potential impact of the COVID-19 
pandemic on the global economy, 
business environment in which the 
Group operates, and its business in 
particular. As at the date of this 
annual report this impact remained 
highly uncertain and difficult 
to predict. 

  The Directors have accordingly 
considered a range of scenarios 
relating to the impact of COVID-19 
which they believe are plausible in the 
context of the Group’s clients, 
services and operations and assessed 
their impact on the Group’s cash 
flows and liquidity for a period of 
12 months from the date of approval 
of these financial statements. In this 
assessment, the Directors had 
regard to the potential reduction in 
receipts from clients that may arise 
from the COVID-19 disruption and to 
options that may be available to the 
Group to mitigate any resulting 
negative impact on its cash flows 
and liquidity. These include: (i) draw 
down of all available borrowing 
facilities; (ii) reductions in its 
operating and capital expenditure; 
and (iii) benefit of measures taken 
by governments and central banks 
in the countries in which the Group 
operates to assist businesses and 
employees, directly or indirectly, to 
meet their financial obligations and 
maintain their business operations 
during the period of the pandemic. 

  As a result of these scenarios, 

the Directors consider that the 
Group will have sufficient liquidity 
within its existing bank facilities, 
totalling £24,000,000, to meet 
its obligations during the next 
12 months. 

41

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsAudit & Risk Committee report continued

With regard to Ebiquity’s external 
auditors, the Committee’s principal 
activities were to:

›	›	 approve the terms of engagement 
and fees to be paid to the external 
auditors;

›	›	 approve the annual audit plan;

›	›	 review the findings of the auditors 
and management’s response; and

›	›	 evaluate the independence and 

objectivity of the external auditors.

Provision of non-audit services
The Committee reviews with 
management the engagement of 
the external auditors for non-audit 
services and the level of associated 
non-audit fees. Details of fees paid 
to PwC during the year are outlined 
in note 4 to the financial statements. 
There were no non-audit fees paid to 
PwC during the year. 

Activities during the year continued
›	›	 going concern: continued 
  The Directors consulted with the 
lenders, Barclays and Royal Bank 
of Scotland, to negotiate covenant 
waivers where required in order to 
negate the risk of any future 
covenant breaches. The existing 
covenants remain in place for the 
12 months to March 2020 and 
June 2020. The March 2020 
covenants have already been 
achieved, and there are no 
concerns over meeting the June 2020 
covenants; revenue would have to 
reduce by 21% between May and 
June 2020 compared to the latest 
prudent expectations for a breach 
to result.

  Agreement in principle has been 

reached with the lenders to replace 
the existing covenants for 
September 2020, December 2020 
and March 2021 with a monthly 
liquidity test that will be in place 
between July 2020 and May 2021. 
This is subject to the agreement of 
legal documentation with the lenders 
which is not yet in place, but which 
the Directors are confident will be 
shortly. Under the Directors’ base 
case scenario, there are no forecast 
breaches of the new liquidity 
covenant tests. The Directors’ 
downside scenario indicates that 
the covenant test at May 2021 is the 
most sensitive but is not breached. 
If revised expectations for this period 
were to worsen then the Directors 
would take the appropriate action 
ahead of time to reduce operating 
costs to mitigate the likelihood of 
a breach.

  The covenants revert to the existing 
measures as at June 2021, which 
under the current base case scenario 
would be breached and would need 
to be waived. The Directors are 
confident, based on the support of 
the lenders, that waivers would be 
granted, however, there is a risk that 
this may not occur. This, and the risk 
that legal documentation is not 
agreed to replace the existing 
covenants for September 2020 
to May 2021, represent a material 
uncertainty that casts significant 
doubt on the Group’s ability to 
continue to operate as a going 
concern. The financial statements 
do not include the adjustments that 
would result if the Group and 
Company were unable to continue 
as a going concern.

External auditors
PwC have been the external auditors 
of the Group since 2012, when a full 
tender process was carried out. 
The original audit partner served from 
PwC’s appointment until completion 
of the audit for the year ended 
31 December 2016, when he rotated 
off the audit. A new partner was 
appointed for the audit of the 
Company’s financial statements for 
the year commencing 1 January 2017. 
A review of PwC’s independence is 
carried out each year before a 
recommendation is made to the Board 
to propose PwC for re-election at the 
AGM. In assessing PwC’s independence, 
the Committee received confirmation 
that, in PwC’s professional judgement, 
PwC is independent within the 
meaning of relevant UK regulatory 
and professional requirements.

42

Ebiquity plcRemuneration Committee report

Committee attendance:

Rob Woodward  

Julie Baddeley  

Tom Alexander  

8/8

8/8

8/8

“The Company will 
continue to review 
its remuneration 
practices and policies 
and will liaise with 
investors where 
appropriate.“

Julie Baddeley

  Remuneration Committee Chair 

Introduction
I am pleased to present the report 
of the Remuneration Committee 
(the ‘Committee’) for the year ended 
31 December 2019. This report details 
the Company’s overall approach to pay, 
benefits and incentives for its 
executives and the remuneration 
arrangements that are in place for 
the Directors.

During the year, the Committee 
reviewed the Group’s Long-Term 
Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’), in conjunction 
with external advisers, to ensure that 
it was in line with market practice and 
suitable for the retention and 
motivation of the executives. 
The outcome of this review was not 
to substantially change the scheme, 
as the Committee concluded that the 
existing structure continued to support 
the delivery of the strategy. The awards 
granted to Directors during the year 
were nil-priced options which vest 
after three years subject to continued 
employment and the achievement of 
both earnings per share (‘EPS’) and 
total shareholder return (‘TSR’) 
performance conditions. 

Details of the scheme are explained 
in more detail below. We will continue 
to monitor and review the LTIP to 
ensure it remains in line with market 
practice for a company of our size and 
the fact that we are a people-based 
business.

Michael Karg stepped down as CEO 
during the year and left the business 
on 31 December 2019. Nick Waters has 
been appointed as Chief Executive 
Officer with effect from 1 July 2020.

The Company will continue to review 
its remuneration practices and policies 
and will liaise with investors where 
appropriate. 

Julie Baddeley
Remuneration Committee Chair

20 May 2020

43

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
Remuneration Committee report continued

Remuneration framework
The Board recognises the need to have the right remuneration framework in place in order to attract and retain people with 
industry-leading skills, knowledge and the experience needed to develop and grow the business, and to incentivise them to 
deliver the strategy and promote long-term sustainable success. The Committee considers the following when setting the 
remuneration framework:

›	›	 the responsibility of the executive’s role, their experience and performance;

›	›	 the remuneration arrangements in place for the wider workforce;

›	›	 market practice at other companies of a similar size and complexity as well as at other companies in the sector;

›	›	 the need to attract and retain executives of the right calibre with the required skills and the need to get the right balance of 

short and long-term incentives; and

›	›	 the need for the short and long-term incentives to be aligned with the Group’s strategy.

For all Executive Directors, the Committee may make use of some or all of the remuneration components set out below. 

Executive Directors
Base salary

Key features

Reflects market practice commensurate with the role and the geography of the 
executive. Reviewed annually to take account of cost of living adjustments, market 
comparators and the individual’s performance in the role.

Purpose and link to strategy

To provide a core level of reward for the completion of core duties. Set at a level to 
attract and retain employees of a sufficient calibre and expertise to deliver the 
Group’s strategy. 

Maximum opportunity

There is no prescribed maximum salary or salary increase, but the Company 
regularly reviews relevant talent markets and the Committee uses its discretion to 
award increases when it considers it necessary. The Committee takes account of 
base salary increments in the rest of the workforce when making any adjustments 
to executive salaries.

Performance measures

The Committee considers the executive’s performance during the period since 
the last review. 

Benefits

Key features

The Remuneration Committee ensures that arrangements for Executive Directors 
are in line with general policies for the workforce, including, but not limited to, 
private medical, life and critical illness insurances, and personal pension 
contributions.

Purpose and link to strategy

To provide current and future heath and security for the executive and their 
dependents in line with local market practice. 

Maximum opportunity

The value of benefits is not capped, but the Committee will consider the aggregate 
value of any benefits when determining what, if any, should be offered.

Performance measures

Not applicable.

44

Ebiquity plcPension 

Key features

Executive Directors are entitled to receive employer contributions to a personal 
pension plan.

Purpose and link to strategy

To provide Executive Directors with long-term savings for the future in line 
with market practice. 

Maximum opportunity

Maximum contribution of 10% of base salary.

Performance measures

Not applicable.

Annual performance bonus

Key features

Discretional annual cash bonus depending on achievement of Group financial 
targets and personal strategic objectives. Targets are reviewed annually by 
the Committee.

Purpose and link to strategy

To incentivise the individual to achieve against a set of agreed short-term financial 
objectives and personal achievements. 

Maximum opportunity

A maximum of 100% of salary may be earned by any one Director in a financial year.

Performance measures

The overall bonus target is linked to budgeted operating profit as well as personal 
objectives relating to the Group’s overall strategy.

Long-Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’)

Key features

Awards are made under the Ebiquity 2012 Executive Share Option Plan (the ‘Plan’). 
The awards are subject to continued employment and the achievement of certain 
financial performance conditions. The Committee may adjust and amend awards 
in accordance with the LTIP rules. Awards are made according to role, performance 
and perceived future value.

Purpose and link to strategy

The provision of an LTIP is intended to provide incentives for longer-term growth 
and value creation through shareholder returns. It aligns the Executive Directors’ 
interests with those of shareholders. 

Maximum opportunity

Awards typically do not exceed 100% of salary and are subject to a maximum of 
200% of salary in exceptional circumstances.

Performance measures

Performance conditions are chosen by the Committee to support the delivery of 
the Company’s strategy and provide alignment between Executive Directors and 
shareholders. Performance conditions may vary each year depending on the 
financial and strategic priorities and performance. Awards granted in 2019 are 
based on the achievement of adjusted EPS and TSR performance conditions, 
as further detailed below. 

45

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsRemuneration Committee report continued

Non-Executive Directors
Fees

Key features

Cash fees determined by the Executive Directors reflect time commitment 
and responsibility (including being a member of, or chairing, the committees). 

Purpose and link to strategy

Set at a level to attract and retain Non-Executive Directors of a sufficient 
calibre with relevant skills and expertise to assist in establishing and monitoring 
the Group’s strategy. 

Maximum opportunity

There is no prescribed maximum, but the Company regularly reviews the fees and 
takes into account relevant market data. 

Performance measures

Evaluation of the Board’s performance takes place annually. 

Directors’ remuneration in the year ended 31 December 2019

  Salary/fees 
£’000 

Taxable 
benefits 
£’000 

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December   31 December  
2018 
Total 
£’000

2019 
Total 
£’000 

Bonus 
£’000 

Executive 

Michael Karg, PhD1 

Kevin McNair2 

Alan Newman3 

Andrew Noble4 

Morag Blazey5 

Non-Executive 

Michael Higgins6 

Rob Woodward 

Richard Nichols 

Julie Baddeley 

Tom Alexander 

346 

63 

240 

— 

— 

— 

85 

35 

35 

35 

839 

16 

— 

1 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

17 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

362 

63 

241 

— 

— 

— 

85 

35 

35 

35 

416

88

—

281

407

43

62

45

45

45

856 

1,432

1.  Michael Karg stepped down as a director on 12 November 2019 and his employment ceased on 31 December 2019. His salary during the period 

was £400,000 per annum and he received £18,614 of taxable benefits. In January 2020, Michael received a payment totalling £513,017 in lieu of 
base salary, pension and healthcare benefits for his notice period, his accrued but untaken holiday, and in settlement of other provisions in 
connection with cessation of employment. This amount is not included in the salary/fees column above.

2.  Kevin McNair resigned as Interim Chief Financial Officer on 7 January 2019. He received a payment in lieu of part of his notice period.

3.  Alan Newman was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 7 January 2019. His salary was set at £225,000. On 12 November 2019, he also took on 

the role of Interim Chief Executive Officer and his salary was increased to £350,000 per annum for the period of time in this role.

4.  Andrew Noble resigned as a director on 2 October 2018 and his employment ceased on 23 December 2018.

5.  Morag Blazey ceased to be a director on 2 January 2019.

6.  Michael Higgins retired from his role as Chairman on 9 May 2018.

Pensions
No Director was a member of a Company pension scheme (FY2018: nil). Contributions totalling £40,000 (FY2018: £32,167) 
were made to Michael Karg’s private pension schemes. No other Director received any pension contributions during the year. 

Annual bonus
For 2019, Executive Directors were eligible for cash bonuses as a percentage of base salary dependent on achievement of 
budgeted operating profit of the Group. Financial targets were not met and therefore no bonus was paid. 

46

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Long-term incentives
During the year, no share options that were previously granted to Directors under the Company’s LTIP vested (FY2018: 285,000 
share options). No Director exercised share options during the year (FY2018: 40,295 share options).

Outstanding share awards 
Share options were granted to the Interim Chief Executive Officer in December 2019 in respect of the financial year to 
31 December 2019 as set out below:

End of  
performance  
period

31/12/2021

Beneficiary 

Grant date 

Volume 

Exercise 
price 

Performance conditions 

Alan Newman 

4 December 
2019 

410,000 

£nil 

 75% of vesting based on EPS growth  
 The EPS portion of the Award will vest in full if  
the Company achieves a 15% compound annual  
growth rate or higher in EPS for the financial year to  
31 December 2021 compared to a reference  
EPS for the financial year to 31 December 2018.  
A minimum compound annual growth rate in EPS of  
8% over this three‐year period will trigger vesting of  
30% of the EPS portion of the Award. There will be  
straight‐line vesting between these points. 

25% of vesting based on TSR growth
 25% of the TSR portion of the Award will vest if  
the Company’s TSR is at least equal to the TSR of the  
AIM Media Index over the three‐year performance period  
to 31 December 2021. The TSR portion of the Award will  
vest in full if the Company’s TSR is at least 8% per annum  
greater than the average TSR of the companies in the  
AIM Media Index. There will be straight‐line vesting  
between these points. TSR will be measured based on  
the three-month average TSR to 31 December 2021  
compared to the three-month average TSR to  
31 December 2018.

Directors’ interests in share plans 
As at 31 December 2019, the following Directors held share options over ordinary shares of 25p each under the Ebiquity 2012 
Executive Share Option Plan:

Share 
options 
lapsed 
during 
the year 

Share 
options 
vested 
during 
the year 

Share 
options 
granted 

Number 
of share 
options at 
during  31 December 
2019 

the year 

End of  
Grant  performance  
period

date 

Beneficiary 

Alan Newman 

Michael Karg 

Michael Karg 

Michael Karg 

Michael Karg 

Michael Karg 

Number 
as at 
  31 December 
2018 

—  

100,000  

100,000  

—  

—  

—  

350,000 

70,000  

350,000 

140,000  

500,000 

300,000  

— 

—  

—  

—  

—  

—  

410,000 

410,000 

3/12/2019  31/12/2021

— 

100,000 

— 

100,000 

26/1/2016 

Vested 
  30/6/2016

26/1/2016 

Vested  
  31/12/2016

— 

— 

— 

280,000 

13/2/2018  31/12/2020

210,000 

13/2/2018  31/12/2021

200,000 

11/7/2018  31/12/2022

47

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration Committee report continued

Directors’ interests in the shares of Ebiquity plc

Michael Karg 

Alan Newman 

Rob Woodward 

Richard Nichols 

Julie Baddeley 

Tom Alexander  

31 December 2019 

31 December 2018

Ordinary 
shares 

Options 

Ordinary 
shares 

Options

41,661 

890,000 

18,160 

1,400,000

160,000 

410,000 

— 

39,980  

100,000  

15,000  

—  

— 

— 

— 

— 

39,980 

100,000 

15,000 

— 

—

—

—

—

—

Termination payments to Directors
One director, Michael Karg, left the Company in the year ended 31 December 2019 and received a total of £513,017 including 
contributions to pension, payment in lieu of healthcare benefits, payment in lieu of his notice period, payment in lieu of his 
accrued but untaken holiday, and in settlement of other provisions in connection with cessation of employment.

Gender pay reporting
The Company published and reported its UK business gender pay gap for the first time under the UK Government’s new 
reporting guidelines in relation to the snapshot date of 5 April 2017 and again reported for the snapshot date of 5 April 2018. 
Although not required in 2019, the Company has continued to report its findings and the most recent report is available on the 
Company’s website.

48

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ report

COVID-19
The Company continues to closely 
monitor the COVID-19 pandemic and 
its impact on our staff, clients and 
operations. Our primary focus is 
ensuring the safety and wellbeing of 
our employees and we have successfully 
implemented a remote working policy 
for all of our offices globally, although 
our staff in China have now returned to 
their offices. 

The COVID-19 disruption is affecting 
our clients’ businesses and their service 
requirements, although the extent and 
timing of its impact over the coming 
months remains uncertain. 

The Company is undertaking prudent 
cost reduction measures in order to 
protect the business and preserve cash 
in the current environment. 
This includes a 20% salary reduction 
taken by the senior management team 
and Board, a deferral of the annual pay 
review, and temporary freeze on 
recruitment. The Group is also utilising, 
to the extent necessary, the different 
government schemes put in place to 
support businesses in many of the 
countries in which it operates, 
including Australia, France, UK 
and USA.

Acquisitions
On 11 June 2019, the Group acquired 
the outstanding 5.97% interest in its 
subsidiary undertaking, Ebiquity 
Germany GmbH, from the minority 
shareholder for cash consideration of 
€380,000 (£336,000).

Events after the reporting period
On 8 January 2020, the Group 
completed the purchase of Digital 
Decisions B.V (‘Digital Decisions’). 
The acquisition was for an initial cash 
consideration of €700,000 (£597,000) 
with further consideration payable in a 
mix of cash and Ebiquity plc shares. 
The first deferred payment will be 
based on performance for the year 
ending 31 December 2020 and the 
second payment will be based on the 
average performance for the years 
ending 31 December 2021 and 
31 December 2022. 

On 3 February 2020, the Company 
announced that it would be acquiring 
the outstanding 49% interest in its 
subsidiary Ebiquity Italy Media Advisor 
S.r.l (‘Ebiquity Italy’) from the founders 
and minority shareholders Arcangelo 
DiNieri and Maria Gabrielli. 
The transaction will complete in 
May 2020. The total consideration 
of €3.6 million is based on an average 
of Ebiquity Italy’s profit before tax and 
management charges for the years 
ending 31 December 2018 and 2019. 
Since the announcement date the 
payment terms have been amended. 
The consideration will now be paid in 
a mix of cash and Ebiquity plc shares. 
At completion 25% of the total 
consideration will be paid in Ebiquity plc 
shares and 5% in cash. The remaining 
cash payments will be paid over the 
following 10 months. 

The Directors present their annual 
report and the audited consolidated 
financial statements for the year 
ended 31 December 2019.

Ebiquity plc is incorporated in England 
and Wales under registered number 
3967525. Its registered address and 
principal office is at Chapter House, 
16 Brunswick Place, London N1 6DZ. 
The Company is the ultimate parent of 
the Group. Its overseas operations are 
subsidiaries (see note 14).

Future developments
The future developments of the Group 
are considered in the strategic report 
on pages 02 to 30.

Dividends
No dividend is being paid in respect 
of the year ending 31 December 2019.

Research and development
The Group continues to invest in the 
development of products. During the 
period, a total of £1,203,000 was 
capitalised in relation to development 
projects. This has resulted in the 
development of a number of new 
products and services.

Political donations and 
political expenditure
It is the Company’s policy not to make 
political donations and, accordingly, 
no political donations were made and 
no political expenditure was incurred in 
the period (FY2018: nil).

Modern Slavery Act 2015
Ebiquity’s statement regarding the 
Modern Slavery Act 2015 can be viewed 
on its website (www.ebiquity.com). 

Disposal
On 2 January 2019, the Company 
announced the completion of the 
disposal of its Advertising Intelligence 
business to Nielsen Media Research 
Limited for net consideration (after 
taxation and transaction costs) of 
approximately £20 million. This 
consideration was dependent on a 
working capital target position at the 
date of completion. The working 
capital acquired by Nielsen was below 
this target and a resulting repayment 
was made to Nielsen of £1,155,000 on 
31 October 2019.

49

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsDirectors’ report continued

Employees
Ebiquity is committed to the 
continuous development of its 
employees. The Group’s employees are 
integral to the success of the business 
and as a result the Group pursues 
employment practices which are 
designed to attract, retain and develop 
this talent to ensure the Group retains 
its market-leading position with 
motivated and satisfied employees. 

Further details of engagement with 
employees are set out on pages 26 
and 27.

The Group seeks to recruit, develop and 
employ throughout the organisation 
suitably qualified, capable and 
experienced people, irrespective of sex, 
age, race, disability, religion or belief, 
marital or civil partnership status, or 
sexual orientation. The Group gives full 
and fair consideration to all 
applications for employment made by 
people with disabilities, having regard 
to their particular aptitudes and 
abilities. Where existing employees 
become disabled, it is the Group’s policy 
to provide continuing employment 
wherever practicable in the same or 
an alternative position and to provide 
appropriate training. It is the policy 
of the Group that training, career 
development and promotion 
opportunities should be available 
to all employees.

Employees are encouraged to own 
shares in the Company, and many 
employees are shareholders and/or 
hold options under the Company’s 
share option schemes.

Financial instruments
The Group’s principal financial 
instruments comprise bank loans 
and cash. The main purpose of these 
financial instruments is to provide 
finance for the Group’s operations. 
The Group has various other financial 
assets and liabilities such as trade 
receivables and trade payables, 
which arise directly from its operations. 
The operations of the Group generate 
cash and the planned growth of 
activities is cash generative. Full details 
of financial instruments are included in 
note 27 to the financial statements.

Substantial shareholdings
At the date of this report, the 
Company’s issued share capital 
consisted of 80,125,626 ordinary shares 
of 25p each and a total of 75,925,626 
voting rights. The Ebiquity plc 2010 
Employee Benefit Trust (the ‘EBT’) 
held 4,200,000 issued ordinary shares 
to satisfy awards for the Company’s 
senior management team. At the date 
of this report, these awards had not 
been exercised. The trustee has agreed 
not to vote on the ordinary shares held 
by it. As such, 4,200,000 ordinary 
shares are treated as not carrying 
voting rights.

At the date of this report, the following 
had notified the Company that they 
held more than 3% of the Company’s 
ordinary share capital, other than the 
shareholdings held by Directors and the 
EBT. No other person has reported an 
interest of more than 3% in the 
Company’s ordinary shares.

Directors 
Details of the Directors serving at the 
end of the year and their biographies 
are set out on pages 32 and 33. 

Alan Newman was appointed Chief 
Financial Officer and a director of the 
Company on 7 January 2019. Kevin 
McNair resigned from the Board as 
Interim Chief Financial Officer on the 
same day.

Michael Karg stepped down as a 
director and Chief Executive Officer 
on 12 November 2019 and left the 
business on 31 December 2019. Alan 
Newman took on the role of Interim 
Chief Executive Officer (and Chief 
Financial Officer) on 12 November 2019. 

Morag Blazey resigned from the Board 
on 2 January 2019. Morag had been 
Managing Principal of the Advertising 
Intelligence practice since 2016 and 
transferred to Nielsen as part of the 
sale of the business which completed 
on 2 January 2019.

Mark Sanford, General Counsel, acts 
as the Company Secretary to the 
Board and its committees.

Further information about the 
Directors’ interests is provided in the 
Remuneration Committee report on 
pages 43 to 48.

Directors’ third-party and pension 
scheme indemnity provisions
The Company purchased and 
maintained throughout the period, and 
up to the date of this report, Directors’ 
and Officers’ liability insurance in 
respect of its Directors and officers 
and those of its subsidiaries and a 
deed of indemnity is in place between 
the Company and each of the 
Directors. There were no pension 
scheme indemnity provisions in place 
during the period.

50

Ebiquity plcShareholders     

Artemis Investment Management 

Canaccord Genuity Wealth Management (Inst) 

BGF Investment Management Limited 

JO Hambro Capital Management  

Legal & General Investment Management 

Herald Investment Management 

Fidelity International 

River and Mercantile Asset Management 

AGM notice
The notice of the Company’s Annual 
General Meeting accompanies this 
document and is also available for 
inspection on the Company’s website. 

Going concern
The Board is responsible for considering 
whether it is appropriate to prepare 
the financial statements on a going 
concern basis. As explained in the 
Audit & Risk Committee report on 
pages 40 to 42, additional work was 
undertaken in light of the COVID-19 
pandemic. This included consulting with 
its lenders and varying the financial 
covenants it has with them. As a result 
of this assessment, the Board 
concluded that the Group will have 
sufficient liquidity within its existing 
bank facilities, totalling £24,000,000, 
to meet its obligations during the next 
12 months. 

As detailed in the Audit & Risk 
Committee report agreement in 
principle has been reached with the 
lenders to replace the existing 
covenants for September 2020, 
December 2020 and March 2021 with 
a monthly liquidity test that will be in 
place between July 2020 and May 2021. 
This is subject to the agreement of 
legal documentation with the lenders 
which is not yet in place, but which the 
Directors are confident will be shortly. 

The covenants revert to the existing 
measures as at June 2021, which under 
the current base case scenario would 
be breached and would need to be 
waived. The Directors are confident, 
based on the support of the lenders, 
that waivers would be granted, 
however, there is a risk that this may 
not occur. This, and the risk that legal 
documentation is not agreed to replace 
the existing covenants for September 
2020 to May 2021, represent a material 
uncertainty that casts significant 
doubt on the Group’s ability to continue 
to operate as a going concern. 
The financial statements do not include 
the adjustments that would result if 
the Group and Company were unable 
to continue as a going concern.

  % of issued  % of voting 
Shares  share capital  share capital

15,344,790 

19.15% 

20.21%

10,179,334 

9,976,441 

  9,500,000 

4,945,200 

4,341,125 

3,709,109 

2,435,695 

12.70% 

12.45% 

11.86% 

6.17% 

5.42% 

4.63% 

3.04% 

13.41%

13.14%

12.51%

6.51%

5.72%

4.89%

3.21%

Independent auditors and 
disclosure of information  
to auditors
All of the current Directors have taken 
all the steps that they ought to have 
taken to make themselves aware of 
any information needed by the Group’s 
auditors for the purposes of their audit 
and to establish that the auditors 
are aware of that information. 
The Directors are not aware of any 
relevant audit information of which 
the auditors are unaware.

The auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers 
LLP, have indicated their willingness to 
continue in office, and a resolution that 
they be reappointed will be proposed at 
the Annual General Meeting.

By order of the Board

Mark Sanford
Company Secretary 

20 May 2020

51

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements

What’s in this section

This section includes our financial statements,  
notes and auditors’ report for the Group.

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

Independent auditors’ report 

Consolidated income statement 

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 

Consolidated statement of financial position 

Consolidated statement of changes in equity 

Consolidated statement of cash flows 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 

Company statement of financial position 

Company statement of changes in equity 

Notes to the Company financial statements 

Advisers 

Shareholder information 

Glossary 

53

54

62

63

64

65

66

67

106

107

108

119

119

120

52

detailed  financialsEbiquity plcStatement of Directors’ responsibilities
in respect of the financial statements

The Directors are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Group 
and Company and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other 
irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Group and Company's transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the 
Group and Company and enable them 
to ensure that the financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the 
Company’s website. Legislation in 
the United Kingdom governing the 
preparation and dissemination of 
financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Directors' confirmations
In the case of each Director in office 
at the date the Directors’ report is 
approved:

•  so far as the Director is aware, there 
is no relevant audit information of 
which the Group and Company’s 
auditors are unaware; and

•  they have taken all the steps that 
they ought to have taken as a 
director in order to make themselves 
aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that 
the Group and Company’s auditors 
are aware of that information. 

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the annual report and the 
financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors 
to prepare financial statements for 
each financial year. Under that law the 
Directors have prepared the Group 
financial statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (‘IFRSs’) as adopted by 
the European Union and Company 
financial statements in accordance with 
United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 
101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ 
and applicable law). Under company 
law the Directors must not approve 
the financial statements unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view of the state of affairs 
of the Group and Company and of 
the profit or loss of the Group and 
Company for that period. In preparing 
the financial statements, the Directors 
are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;

•  state whether applicable IFRSs as 

adopted by the European Union have 
been followed for the Group financial 
statements and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, comprising 
FRS 101, have been followed for 
the Company financial statements, 
subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements;

•  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable and 
prudent; and

•  prepare the financial statements on 
the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the 
Group and Company will continue in 
business.

53

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsIndependent auditors’ report
to the members of Ebiquity plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements
Opinion
In our opinion:

•  Ebiquity plc’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a true and fair 

view of the state of the group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 31 December 2019 and of the group’s loss and cash flows for 
the year then ended;

•  the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 

(IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union;

•  the company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”, and 
applicable law); and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual report (the “Annual Report”), which comprise: the 
consolidated and company statements of financial position as at 31 December 2019; the consolidated income statement, the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated statement of cash flows, and the consolidated and company 
statements of changes in equity for the year then ended; and the notes to the financial statements, which include a description of 
the significant accounting policies.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial 
statements in the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other 
ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

Material uncertainty related to going concern 
In forming our opinion on the group and company financial statements, which is not modified, we have considered the adequacy of 
the disclosure made in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements and note 2 to the Company financial statements concerning 
the group’s and company’s ability to continue as a going concern. 

The Directors have given specific consideration to the potential impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the global economy, business 
environment in which the company operates and its business in particular. The Directors have considered a range of scenarios 
relating to the impact of Covid-19 which they believe are plausible in the context of the group’s and company's operations and 
assessed their impact on the group’s and company’s cash flows and liquidity for a period of 12 months from the date of approval 
of the financial statements. As a result of these scenarios, the Directors consider that the group and company will have sufficient 
liquidity within its existing bank facilities, totalling £24,000,000, to meet its obligations during the next 12 months. 

Agreement in principle has been reached with the lenders to replace the existing covenants for September 2020, December 
2020 and March 2021 with a monthly liquidity test that will be in place between July 2020 and May 2021. This is subject to the 
agreement of legal documentation with the lenders which is not yet in place, but which the Directors are confident will be shortly. 
Under the Directors’ base case scenario there are no forecast breaches of the new liquidity covenant tests. If revised expectations 
for this period were to worsen then the Directors would take the appropriate actions ahead of time to reduce operating costs to 
mitigate the likelihood of a breach. 

The covenants revert to the existing measures as at June 2021, which under the current base case scenario would be breached 
and would need to be waived. The Directors are confident, based on the support of the lenders, that waivers would be granted 
however there is a risk that this may not occur. 

These conditions, along with the other matters explained in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements and note 2 to the 
Company financial statements, indicate the existence of a material uncertainty which may cast significant doubt about the 
group’s and company’s ability to continue as a going concern. The group and company financial statements do not include the 
adjustments that would result if the group and company are unable to continue as a going concern.

54

Ebiquity plcAudit procedures performed
In concluding there is a material uncertainty, our audit procedures evaluated the Directors’ assessment of the group’s forecast 
trading for at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements and the downside scenarios that have been 
modelled. We have understood the impact on forecast liquidity and covenant compliance.

In assessing the impact of the above scenarios, which are referred to in note 1 of the financial statements, we performed the 
following procedures on the Directors’ assessment that the group and company will continue as a going concern:

•  We obtained management’s paper that supports the Board’s assessments and conclusions with respect to the disclosures 

provided around going concern;

•  We discussed with management the impact assessments applied in the going concern reviews so we could understand and 
challenge the rationale for those assumptions, including our knowledge of the business, the sector and wider commentary 
available from key customers;

•  We obtained the monthly trading results to April 2020, and flash trading results thereafter for 2020 year to date, and 

compared to the management’s original and revised forecasts, and considered the impact of these actual results on the future 
forecast period;

•  We understood the mitigating actions that have and could be taken by management, including suspending dividend payments, 

receipt of government support, such as grants and subsidies, and restructuring of headcount;

•  We assessed management’s sensitivity scenario, which also includes further potential mitigating actions available, to confirm 
they are within management’s control. We challenged management to run further downside scenarios in order to assess the 
possible impact;

•  We assessed the availability of liquidity resources under different scenarios modelled by management, and assessed 

compliance of the associated covenants tests;

•  We obtained and read the written confirmation from the lenders that agreement in principle has been reached with the lenders 
to replace the existing covenants for September 2020, December 2020 and March 2021 with a monthly liquidity test that will be 
in place between July 2020 and May 2021;

•  We evaluated additional downside sensitivities and considered the impact on covenants and liquidity headroom; and

•  We assessed the disclosures in the Annual report and financial statements relating to going concern, including the material 

uncertainties, to ensure they were fair, balanced and understandable and in compliance with IAS 1.

Our audit approach
Context
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial 
statements. In particular, we looked at where the directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant 
accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. 

As in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, including evaluating whether there 
was evidence of bias by the directors that represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.

Overview

•  Overall group materiality: £200,000 (2018: £250,000), based on 5% of profit before tax and 

highlighted items from continuing operations.

Materiality

•  Overall company materiality: £784,000 (2018: £988,000), based on 1% of total assets.

Audit
Scope

•  Six reporting units were audited as full scope entities. These units were located in the U.K., 

Germany, France, USA and Australia.

•  The USA entities in scope were visited and audited by the Group engagement team.

•  The components in Australia, Germany and France were audited by local audit teams.

•  Risk of impairment of goodwill and intangible assets (Group).

Key Audit
Matters

•  Accounting for contract revenue recognition (Group).

•  Going concern consideration for Covid-19 (Group and Company).

• 

Impairment of investments (Company).

55

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Ebiquity plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements continued
Our audit approach continued
The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial 
statements. In particular, we looked at where the directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant 
accounting estimates that involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As in all 
of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, including evaluating whether there was 
evidence of bias by the directors that represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the 
financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether 
or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; 
the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any comments we 
make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, 
and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. In addition to going concern, 
described in the Material uncertainty related to going concern section above, we determined the matters described below to be 
the key audit matters to be communicated in our report. This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit. 

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Risk of impairment of goodwill  
and intangible assets (Group)
We focused on this area because management’s assessment 
of the carrying value of goodwill and intangible assets 
involves subjective assumptions about the future results 
of the business.

The key assumptions applied by management were future 
revenue growth, cost assumptions and the discount rate used 
as set out in note 10 to the Group financial statements.

We focused on those Cash Generating Units (CGUs) we 
considered to carry more judgement because of current year 
losses or historical underperformance against budgets, or for 
which management’s impairment model gave lower headroom 
relative to other CGUs.

The Value In Use (VIU) calculations in relation to the Group’s 
China CGU (goodwill of £2,150k) and Media America CGU 
(goodwill and intangible assets of £604k) were most sensitive 
to changes in key assumptions.

We have evaluated management’s future cash flow 
forecasts, which were prepared to a sufficiently detailed 
level, including comparing them to the latest Board approved 
budgets, testing the integrity of the underlying calculations 
and assessing how both internal and external drivers of 
performance were incorporated into the projections. 
We also challenged the discount rates used by independently 
recalculating the cost of capital.

In respect of the China and Media America CGUs, we have 
assessed each of the assumptions that have been applied 
to the impairment model and agree with the amount of the 
impairment that has been recognised.

The Media America business under performed in 2019, 
suffering a decline in revenue and a change in senior 
management. A revised strategic plan has been developed 
and approved by the Board which we have reviewed and 
understood the impact of on the 2020 forecast.

For both CGUs, we compared the 2019 financial performance 
to budget and understood the reasons for the differences 
from the forecasts prepared for the impairment assessment 
in the prior year. We also performed sensitivity analysis over 
the key drivers of the cash flow forecasts, in particular the 
revenue, growth, cost assumptions and discount rate. Having 
ascertained the extent of change in those assumptions 
that either individually or collectively would be required 
for the goodwill and intangible assets to be impaired, we 
considered the likelihood of such movement arising in those 
key assumptions. 

Therefore, we also examined the disclosures made in the 
financial statements and concluded that they are appropriate 
given the sensitivity of the China and Media America CGU to 
changes in assumptions.

56

Ebiquity plcKey audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

We understood management’s policies and their controls for 
recording revenue.

We performed detailed end-to-end walkthroughs of the 
finance and operational processes, utilising our understanding 
from prior years to reassess the design effectiveness of the key 
internal controls and identify changes, if any.

We reviewed a sample of the terms and conditions attached 
to revenue contracts and evaluated management’s 
judgements used to determine the timing of recognition 
of revenue.

We selected a number of contracts to audit, including 
those with significant revenue recognised in the year or 
with significant contract assets and a further sample on 
a random basis.

To assess whether revenue and profit is accurately recorded, 
we tested the hours completed on a sample of contracts by 
obtaining an understanding from project managers as to the 
budgeted hours, challenging the assumptions, evaluating the 
outturn of previous estimates and agreeing the actual hours 
incurred post-year end to the forecast for the period.

We also assessed how the project managers determined that 
the stage of completion was correctly calculated by obtaining 
their calculations and agreeing the inputs to supporting 
evidence and correspondence with customers. We found 
that revenue was recorded appropriately.

To test the timing of contract revenue, we challenged 
management's judgements on the completeness of work 
for our sample of contracts by checking original contracts, 
amendments to contracts, where applicable (e.g. due to 
agreed changes in scope), and checking that the contractual 
milestones had been reached.

No significant issues were noted from our work. 

Accounting for contract revenue recognition (Group)
Income is recognised in accordance with the stage 
of completion of the contract activity for the Media, 
Analytics & Tech businesses. The stage of completion is 
determined relative to the total number of hours expected 
to complete the work or provision of services.

Where recorded revenue exceeds amounts invoiced to clients, 
the excess is classified as contract asset and where recorded 
revenue is less than amounts invoiced to clients, the difference 
is classified as contract liability.

Where services are performed by an indeterminate number of 
acts over a specific period, revenue is recognised on a straight 
line basis over the specific period unless there is evidence that 
some other method better represents the stage of completion.

If the outcome of a contract cannot be estimated reliably, 
the contract revenue is recognised to the extent of contract 
costs incurred that it is probable would be recoverable. Costs 
are recognised as an expense in the period in which they are 
incurred.

Careful consideration needs to be given to projects open at 
year end requiring significant judgement in respect of the 
stage of completion and the associated revenue and profit 
to be recognised.

The total amount of revenue and profit to be recognised 
under a contract can be affected by changes in conditions 
and circumstances over time, such as:

•  variations to the original contract terms

•  cost overruns

•  scope changes that require further negotiation and 

settlement.

Variations can arise from changing client specifications, 
changes to the job based on unforeseen circumstances 
(e.g. macroeconomic factors), as well as from inefficiencies 
on the part of either party. There can be some uncertainties, 
therefore, in determining the amounts to be recovered from 
any additional work performed.

The risk is, therefore, that contract revenue is not recognised 
in the correct period or that revenue and associated profit 
is misstated.

57

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Ebiquity plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements continued
Our audit approach continued
Key audit matters continued

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Going concern consideration for Covid-19 
(Group and Company)
Management consider COVID-19 to be a non-adjusting event 
as at the balance sheet date and have made disclosures in 
note 34 to the financial statements on that basis. 

The ongoing and rapid spread of the disease prompted 
reactions that have had an impact on the group. As part 
of the review management focussed on the timing of 
government interventions, deferral of dividend payments 
and the impact from the workforce working from home. 
The impact if treated as a non-adjusting event is that the 
annual report is prepared assuming no impact, but that the 
potential future impact is considered as part of the going 
concern review and disclosures only. 

The main focus of our work has therefore been in respect 
of the post balance sheet event disclosures as well as 
management’s going concern assessment due to the 
uncertainties created by the impact of Covid-19 on the 
business and the group’s compliance with banking covenants. 

We understand and agree with the non-adjusting conclusion 
made by management. 

In assessing the impact of the scenarios set out by 
management in their going concern model, we performed 
procedures on the Directors’ assessment that the group and 
company will be able to continue as a going concern but that 
a material uncertainty exists. Please refer to the section 
“Material uncertainty related to going concern” above for 
details.

With regards to the post balance sheet events disclosure, 
we agree with the expected impact as set out by management 
in note 34 and consider the disclosures to be adequate. 

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Impairment of investments (Company)
The investment in subsidiary companies is a material balance 
within the Company balance sheet and there is risk of 
impairment if the carrying values are deemed to be in excess of 
the recoverable amount.

We have reviewed investments for indicators of impairment.

Where indicators of impairment exist, for example where the 
investment’s carrying value is in excess of its net assets we 
have obtained management's impairment assessment.

We have audited management’s assumptions in the 
impairment assessment, and we concur with the conclusion 
that no impairment is required as at 31 December 2019, except 
for the impairment of investments in relation to Stratigent 
LLC which has been recognised in the company’s financial 
statements. 

58

Ebiquity plcHow we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial 
statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the group and the company, the accounting processes and controls, 
and the industry in which they operate.

The following matters are considered when determining the scope of the audit by component:

•  We identify components which are financially significant to the Group;

•  We identify components considered likely to include a significant risk of material misstatement to the Group financial 

statements;

•  We consider the findings from prior year audits and assess whether it would provide further insight to the Group to revisit 

certain territories to provide an update; and

•  We consider if there are any other components that contribute a significant amount to key income statement and balance 
sheet measures and ensure sufficient coverage of each material line item in the financial statements is obtained through 
components in scope. 

We also considered locations visited and those out of scope in the prior three years. The scoping calculation is based upon 
obtaining sufficient coverage of each financial statement line item, which varies depending on the risk assessment.

The Group operates through subsidiaries in the US, Australia, China, UK, France, Germany and other European countries. There are 
four financially significant components being: Ebiquity plc, Ebiquity Associates Ltd, Ebiquity Germany GmbH and Ebiquity SAS; for 
the purpose of obtaining required coverage over the Group balances, we have also included in our scope Ebiquity Inc. (incorporated 
in USA) and Ebiquity Pty Ltd (incorporated in Australia). The specified procedures had been performed in respect of Ebiquity Italia 
S.r.l. using the Group materiality.

The scoping calculation is based upon obtaining sufficient coverage of each financial statement line item, which varies depending 
on the risk assessment.

We also considered locations visited and those out of scope in the prior three years. The scoping calculation is based upon 
obtaining sufficient coverage of each financial statement line item, which varies depending on the risk assessment.

The Group audit is performed in the UK by the same engagement leader and team as audited components incorporated in the UK; 
the German and Australian components have been audited by other network firms; the French component has been audited by 
BDO France, local statutory auditor. As part of our audit procedures we have obtained access to the audit files of the components 
not directly audited by PwC UK and have reviewed the work performed. In the current year we visited the component in France, 
and attended the clearance meeting by conference call in Germany, Australia and France.

59

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Ebiquity plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements continued
Our audit approach continued
Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. 
These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and 
extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect 
of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Group financial statements

Company financial statements

Overall materiality

£200,000 (2018: £250,000).

£784,000 (2018: £988,000).

How we determined it

5% of profit before tax and highlighted 
items from continuing operations.

1% of total assets.

Rationale for benchmark applied

Based on the benchmarks used in the 
annual report, profit before tax and 
highlighted items from continuing 
operations is the primary measure 
used by the shareholders in assessing 
the performance of the Group, and is a 
generally accepted auditing benchmark.

Based on total assets as the entity holds 
all of the Group’s subsidiary investments 
and is not a profit generating entity.

For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall group materiality. 
The range of materiality allocated across components was between £40,000 and £190,000. Certain components were audited 
to a local statutory audit materiality that was also less than our overall group materiality.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £10,000 
(Group audit) (2018: £15,000) and £10,000 (Company audit) (2018: £15,000) as well as misstatements below those amounts 
that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Reporting on other information 
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our auditors’ 
report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the 
other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this 
report, any form of assurance thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained 
in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material 
misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material misstatement of the financial 
statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that 
there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based 
on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the UK 
Companies Act 2006 have been included. 

Based on the responsibilities described above and our work undertaken in the course of the audit, ISAs (UK) require us also to 
report certain opinions and matters as described below.

Strategic Report and Directors’ Report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report for the year ended 31 December 2019 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared 
in accordance with applicable legal requirements. 

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, 
we did not identify any material misstatements in the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report. 

60

Ebiquity plcResponsibilities for the financial statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the financial statements set out on page 53, 
the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in accordance with the applicable framework and for 
being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. The directors are also responsible for such internal control as they determine 
is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting 
unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative 
but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a 
high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the 
aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial 
statements. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at:  
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance with 
Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume 
responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save 
where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

Other required reporting
Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received 

from branches not visited by us; or

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

•  the company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns. 

We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility. 

Richard Porter  
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London

20 May 2020

61

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsConsolidated income statement
for the year ended 31 December 2019

Revenue 

Project-related costs 

Net revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Administrative expenses  

Operating profit/(loss)   

Finance income 

Finance expenses 

Net finance costs 

Profit/(loss) before taxation  
from continuing operations 

Taxation (charge)/credit  
– continuing operations   

Profit/(loss) for the year  
– continuing operations   

Net (loss)/profit from  
discontinued operations  

Profit/(loss) for the year  

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Non-controlling interests 

Year ended 
31 December 2019 

Year ended 
31 December 2018 
as restated (note 1)

Before  Highlighted 
items 
(note 3) 
£’000 

highlighted 
items 
£’000 

Before  Highlighted 
items 
(note 3) 
£’000 

highlighted 
items 
£’000 

Total 
£’000 

Note 

2 

68,733 

(8,857) 

59,876 

(27,355) 

32,521 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

68,733 

69,368 

(8,857) 

(8,813) 

59,876 

60,555 

(27,355) 

(28,787) 

32,521 

31,768 

4 

6 

6 

(26,354) 

(10,330) 

(36,684) 

(25,426) 

6,167 

(10,330) 

(4,163) 

6,342 

9 

(907) 

(898) 

— 

— 

— 

9 

(907) 

(898) 

25 

(1,176) 

(1,151) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(7,695) 

(7,695) 

— 

— 

— 

Total 
£’000

69,368

(8,813)

60,555

(28,787)

31,768

(33,121)

(1,353)

25

(1,176)

(1,151)

5,269 

(10,330) 

(5,061) 

5,191 

(7,695) 

(2,504)

7 

(1,931) 

454 

(1,477) 

(1,778) 

(207) 

(1,985)

3,338 

(9,876) 

(6,538) 

3,413 

(7,902) 

(4,489)

8 

— 

(1,018) 

3,338 

(10,894) 

(1,018) 

(7,556) 

2,875 

(10,882) 

(8,007) 

463 

(12) 

451 

3,338 

(10,894) 

(7,556) 

644 

4,057 

3,568 

489 

4,057 

(1,489) 

(9,391) 

(845)

(5,334)

(9,374) 

(5,806)

(17) 

472

(9,391) 

(5,334)

Earnings per share – continuing operations 

Basic 

Diluted 

Earnings per share – discontinued operations 

Basic 

Diluted 

9 

9 

9 

9 

The notes on pages 67 to 105 are an integral part of these financial statements.

(8.79)p 

(8.79)p 

(1.28)p 

(1.28)p 

(6.35)p

(6.35)p

(1.05)p

(1.05)p

62

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
for the year ended 31 December 2019

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

(Loss) for the year 

Other comprehensive (expense)/income: 

Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss   

Exchange differences on translation of overseas subsidiaries 

Total other comprehensive (expense)/income for the year 

Total comprehensive expense for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Non-controlling interests 

The notes on pages 67 to 105 are an integral part of these financial statements.

(7,556) 

(5,334)

(716) 

(716) 

267

267

(8,272) 

(5,067)

(8,723) 

(5,539)

451 

472

(8,272) 

(5,067)

63

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of financial position
as at 31 December 2019

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Note 

Non‑current assets 

Goodwill 

Other intangible assets   

Property, plant and equipment 

Right-of-use assets 

Deferred tax asset 

Total non‑current assets  

Current assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Assets held for sale 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables 

Liabilities held for sale 

Accruals and contract liabilities 

Financial liabilities 

Current tax liabilities 

Provisions   

Lease liabilities 

Deferred tax liability 

Total current liabilities 

Non‑current liabilities 

Financial liabilities 

Provisions   

Lease liabilities 

Deferred tax liability 

Total non‑current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Ordinary shares 

Share premium 

Other reserves 

Retained earnings 

Equity attributable to the owners of the parent 

Non‑controlling interests 

Total equity 

10 

11 

12 

13 

22 

15 

16 

17 

18 

16 

19 

20 

7 

21 

13 

22 

20 

21 

13 

22 

28,409 

34,774

6,763 

2,563 

8,339 

986 

8,477

1,170

—

979

47,060 

45,400

27,586 

29,408

— 

8,236 

35,822 

82,882 

27,734

8,793

65,935

111,335

(5,575) 

— 

(7,510)

(4,316)

(9,084) 

(10,640)

22 

(4,152) 

(300) 

(1,834) 

(272) 

(2,822)

(1,358)

(570)

—

(323)

(21,195) 

(27,539)

(13,868) 

(34,934)

(387) 

(7,756) 

(1,036) 

(67)

—

(1,281)

(23,047) 

(36,282)

(44,242) 

(63,821)

38,640 

47,514

24 

20,029 

19,778

46 

4,428 

12,958 

37,461 

1,179 

38,640 

44

5,144

21,556

44,522

992

47,514

The notes on pages 67 to 105 are an integral part of these financial statements. The financial statements on pages 62 to 66 were 
approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 19 May 2020 and were signed on its behalf by:

Alan Newman
Director 
Ebiquity plc. Registered No. 03967525

20 May 2020

64

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 December 2019

Note 

24 

3 

28 

31 December 2017 

(Loss)/profit for the year  

Other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive  
income/(expense) for the year  

Shares issued for cash 

Share options charge 

Dividends paid to shareholders 

Dividends paid to  
non-controlling interests  

31 December 2018 

(Loss)/profit for the year  

Other comprehensive expense 

Total comprehensive  
(expense)/income for the year  

Shares issued for cash 

Share options charge 

24 

3 

Acquisition of minority interest 

Dividends paid to shareholders 

28 

Dividends paid to  
non-controlling interests  

31 December 2019 

Ordinary 
shares 
£’000 

19,549 

— 

— 

— 

229 

— 

— 

— 

19,778 

— 

— 

— 

251 

— 

— 

— 

— 

20,029 

21 

— 

— 

— 

23 

— 

— 

— 

44 

— 

— 

— 

2 

— 

— 

— 

— 

46 

Share 
premium 
£’000 

Other 
reserves1 
£’000 

Equity  
  attributable  
Retained  to owners of 
the parent 
earnings 
£’000 
£’000 

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
£’000 

4,877 

27,495 

51,942 

1,040 

— 

267 

(5,806) 

(5,806) 

— 

267 

472 

— 

Total 
equity
£’000

52,982

(5,334)

267

267 

(5,806) 

(5,539) 

472 

(5,067)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

394 

252 

394 

(527) 

(527) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(520) 

5,144 

21,556 

46,522 

— 

(8,007) 

(8,007) 

(716) 

— 

(716) 

992 

451 

— 

252

394

(527)

(520)

47,514

(7,556)

(716)

(716) 

(8,007) 

(8,723) 

451 

(8,272)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

195 

(252) 

(534) 

253 

195 

(252) 

(534) 

— 

— 

4,428 

12,958 

37,461 

— 

— 

(83) 

— 

253

195

(335)

(534)

(181) 

1,179 

(181)

38,640

1.  Includes a credit of £3,667,000 (31 December 2018: £3,667,000) in the merger reserve, a gain of £2,239,000 (31 December 2018: £2,955,000) 
recognised in the translation reserve, and is partially offset by a debit balance of £1,478,000 (31 December 2018: £1,478,000) in the ESOP 
reserve. Refer to note 25 for further details. 

The notes on pages 67 to 105 are an integral part of these financial statements. 

65

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Note 

29 

5,657 

7,631

(727) 

(1,093)

9 

(1,345) 

3,594 

— 

24,845 

(335) 

(648) 

(2,024) 

(1,211) 

25

(1,952)

4,611

—

—

—

(858)

(643)

(1,141)

20,627 

(2,642)

253 

— 

(20,000) 

(204) 

(1,192) 

(534) 

(518) 

— 

(22,195) 

2,026 

6,414 

(204) 

8,236 

252

2,000

(1,250)

(70)

—

(527)

(190)

(4)

211

2,180

4,325

(91)

6,414

8 

20 

20 

12 

11 

20 

20 

13 

28 

17 

17 

Consolidated statement of cash flows
for the year ended 31 December 2019

Cash flows from operating activities   

Cash generated from operations 

Finance expenses paid 

Finance income received  

Income taxes paid 

Net cash generated from operating activities  

Cash flows from investing activities 

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired 

Disposal of subsidiaries   

Payments to acquire non-controlling interest 

Payments in respect of contingent consideration 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of intangible assets 

Net cash generated by/(used in) investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 

Proceeds from issue of share capital (net of issue costs) 

Proceeds from bank borrowings 

Repayment of bank borrowings 

Bank loan fees paid 

Repayment of lease liabilities 

Dividends paid to shareholders 

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests 

Capital repayment of finance leases 

Net cash flow (used in)/generated by financing activities 

Net increase in cash, cash equivalents and bank overdrafts 

Cash, cash equivalents and bank overdraft at beginning of year   

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents   

Group cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

The notes on pages 67 to 105 are an integral part of these financial statements.

66

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 2019

1. Accounting policies 
General information
Ebiquity plc (the ‘Company’) and its 
subsidiaries (together, the ‘Group’) 
exists to help brands optimise return 
on investment from their marketing 
spend, working with many of the 
world’s leading advertisers to improve 
marketing outcomes and enhance 
business performance. The Group 
has 18 offices.

The Company is a public limited 
company, which is listed on the 
London Stock Exchange’s AIM and is 
incorporated and domiciled in the UK. 
The address of its registered office is 
Chapter House, 16 Brunswick Place, 
London N1 6DZ.

Basis of preparation
The consolidated financial statements 
have been prepared in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards, International Accounting 
Standards and IFRS IC Interpretations 
(collectively ‘IFRSs’) issued by the 
International Accounting Standards 
Board (‘IASB’) as adopted by the 
European Union (‘Adopted IFRSs’) and 
with those parts of the Companies Act 
2006 applicable to companies preparing 
their financial statements under 
Adopted IFRSs. 

The consolidated financial statements 
have been prepared on a going concern 
basis. The Group meets its day-to-day 
working capital requirements through 
its cash reserves and borrowings, 
described in note 20. As at 31 December 
2019, the Group had cash balances of 
£8,236,000 and undrawn bank facilities 
available of £10,000,000, and was 
cash generative and within its banking 
covenants.

In assessing the going concern of the 
Group, the Directors have considered 
the Group’s forecasts and projections, 
taking account of reasonably possible 
changes in trading performance and the 
Group’s cash flows, liquidity and bank 
facilities. 

In accordance with the guidance issued 
by the Financial Reporting Council, 
the Directors have given specific 
consideration to the potential impact of 
the COVID-19 pandemic on the global 
economy, business environment in which 
the Group operates, and its business in 
particular. As at the date of this annual 
report this impact remained highly 
uncertain and difficult to predict. The 
Directors have accordingly considered 
a range of scenarios relating to the 
impact of COVID-19 which they believe 
are plausible in the context of the 
Group’s clients, services and operations 
and assessed their impact on the 
Group’s cash flows and liquidity for a 
period of 12 months from the date of 
approval of these financial statements. 
In this assessment, the Directors had 
regard to the potential reduction in 
receipts from clients that may arise 
from the COVID-19 disruption and 
to options that may be available to 
the Group to mitigate any resulting 
negative impact on its cash flows and 
liquidity. These include: (i) draw down 
of all available borrowing facilities; 
(ii) reductions in its operating and 
capital expenditure; and (iii) benefit of 
measures taken by governments and 
central banks in the countries in which 
the Group operates to assist businesses 
and employees, directly or indirectly, 
to meet their financial obligations and 
maintain their business operations 
during the period of the pandemic. 

As a result of these scenarios, 
the Directors consider that the 
Group will have sufficient liquidity 
within its existing bank facilities, 
totalling £24,000,000, to meet its 
obligations during the next 12 months. 

The Directors consulted with the 
lenders, Barclays and Royal Bank of 
Scotland, to negotiate covenant waivers 
where required in order to negate the 
risk of any future covenant breaches. 
The existing covenants remain in place 
for the 12 months to March 2020 and 
June 2020. The March 2020 covenants 
have already been achieved and there 
are no concerns over meeting the June 
2020 covenants; revenue would have to 
reduce by 21% between May and June 
2020 compared to the latest prudent 
expectations for a breach to result.

Agreement in principle has been 
reached with the lenders to replace the 
existing covenants for September 2020, 
December 2020 and March 2021 with 
a monthly liquidity test that will be in 
place between July 2020 and May 2021. 
This is subject to the agreement of legal 
documentation with the lenders which is 
not yet in place, but which the Directors 
are confident will be shortly. Under the 
Directors’ base case scenario there 
are no forecast breaches of the new 
liquidity covenant tests. The Directors’ 
downside scenario indicates that the 
covenant test at May 2021 is the most 
sensitive but is not breached. If revised 
expectations for this period were to 
worsen then the Directors would take 
the appropriate actions ahead of time 
to reduce operating costs to mitigate 
the likelihood of a breach.

The covenants revert to the existing 
measures as at June 2021, which under 
the current base case scenario would be 
breached and would need to be waived. 
The Directors are confident, based on 
the support of the lenders that waivers 
would be granted, however, there is a 
risk that this may not occur. This, and 
the risk that the legal documentation 
is not agreed to replace the existing 
covenants for September 2020 to May 
2021, represent a material uncertainty 
that casts significant doubt on the 
Group's ability to continue to operate 
as a going concern. The financial 
statements do not include the 
adjustments that would result if the 
Group were unable to continue as a 
going concern.

The financial statements have 
been prepared under the historical 
cost convention, as modified by the 
revaluation of financial assets and 
financial liabilities at fair value through 
profit or loss. 

The consolidated financial statements 
are presented in pounds sterling and 
rounded to the nearest thousand.

The principal accounting policies 
adopted in these consolidated financial 
statements are set out below. These 
policies have been consistently applied 
to all periods presented, unless 
otherwise stated.

67

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

1. Accounting policies continued
Basis of preparation continued
On 13 February 2018, the Group agreed 
to sell its Advertising Intelligence 
(‘AdIntel’) business to Nielsen 
Media Research Limited (‘Nielsen’), 
a subsidiary of Nielsen Holdings plc; 
the transaction was approved as at 
31 December 2018 and completion 
took place on 2 January 2019. 
On 19 March 2018, the Group entered 
into an agreement to sell the business 
assets of its Reputation division; 
completion took place on 31 March 2018. 
Collectively, these divisions formed the 
Intel segment. Accordingly, the profit 
on disposal arising in the current year 
and the results in the comparative year 
of this segment have been presented 
within discontinued operations in 
the income statement. The assets 
and liabilities of the AdIntel business 
were reported as held for sale in the 
statement of financial position in the 
comparative year.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements 
incorporate the financial statements 
of the Company and entities controlled 
by the Company (its subsidiaries). 
Control is achieved where the Company 
has the power to govern the financial 
and operating policies of an investee 
entity so as to obtain benefits from its 
activities. The results of each subsidiary 
are included from the date that control 
is transferred to the Group until the 
date that control ceases.

Where necessary, adjustments are 
made to the financial statements of 
subsidiaries to bring the accounting 
policies used in line with those used by 
the Group. All intra-group transactions, 
balances, income and expenses are 
eliminated on consolidation.

Non-controlling interests represent 
the portion of the results and net 
assets in subsidiaries that is not held 
by the Group.

68

Business combinations  
and goodwill
The Group applies the acquisition 
method to account for business 
combinations. The cost of the 
acquisition is measured as the 
aggregate of the fair values, at the date 
of exchange, of assets given, liabilities 
assumed, and equity instruments issued 
by the Group in exchange for control of 
the acquiree. The acquiree’s identifiable 
assets, liabilities and contingent 
liabilities are recognised initially at 
their fair value at the acquisition date. 
Goodwill is initially measured at cost, 
being the excess of the aggregate of 
the consideration transferred over the 
fair value of net identifiable assets 
acquired and liabilities assumed. 
The determination of the fair values of 
acquired assets and liabilities is based 
on judgement, and the Directors have 
12 months from the date of the business 
combination to finalise the allocation of 
the purchase price.

Goodwill is allocated to each of 
the Group’s cash-generating units 
expected to benefit from the synergies 
of the combination. Following initial 
recognition, goodwill is measured at 
cost less any accumulated impairment 
losses. Goodwill is reviewed for 
impairment at least annually or 
whenever there is evidence that it 
may be required. Any impairment 
is recognised immediately in the 
income statement and is not 
subsequently reversed.

Goodwill arising on the acquisition of 
the Group’s interest in an associate, 
being the excess of the cost of 
acquisition over the Group’s share of 
the fair values of the identifiable net 
assets of the associate, is included 
within the carrying amount of the 
investment. The non-controlling 
shareholders’ interest in the acquiree is 
initially measured at the non-controlling 
interest’s proportion of the net fair 
value of the assets, liabilities and 
contingent liabilities recognised.

Where transactions with non-controlling 
parties do not result in a change in 
control, the difference between the 
fair value of the consideration paid or 
received and the amount by which the 
non-controlling interest is adjusted, 
is recognised in equity.

Where the consideration for the 
acquisition includes a contingent 
consideration arrangement, this is 
measured at fair value at the acquisition 
date. Any subsequent changes to 
the fair value of the contingent 
consideration are adjusted against 
the cost of the acquisition if they occur 
within the measurement period and 
only if the changes relate to conditions 
existing at the acquisition date. 
Any subsequent changes to the fair 
value of the contingent consideration 
after the measurement period are 
recognised in the income statement 
within administrative expenses as a 
highlighted item. The carrying value 
of contingent consideration at the 
statement of financial position date 
represents management’s best 
estimate of the future payment at that 
date, based on historical results and 
future forecasts.

All costs directly attributable to the 
business combination are expensed 
as incurred and recorded in the income 
statement within highlighted items.

Revenue recognition
Revenue from providing services is 
recognised in the accounting period 
in which the services are rendered. 
For fixed-price contracts, revenue is 
recognised based on the actual service 
provided to the end of the reporting 
period as a proportion of the total 
services to be provided because the 
customer receives and uses the benefits 
simultaneously. This is determined 
based on the actual labour hours 
spent relative to the total expected 
labour hours. 

Estimates of revenues, costs or extent 
of progress toward completion are 
revised if circumstances change. 
Any resulting increases or decreases 
in estimated revenues or costs are 
reflected in profit or loss in the period 
in which the circumstances that give 
rise to the revision become known 
by management.

In the case of fixed-price contracts, 
the customer pays the fixed amount 
based on a payment schedule. If the 
services rendered by the Company 
exceed the payment, a contract asset 
is recognised. If the payments exceed 
the services rendered, a contract liability 
is recognised.

Ebiquity plcFinance income and expenses
Finance income and expense 
represents interest receivable and 
payable. Finance income and expense 
is recognised on an accruals basis, 
based on the interest rate applicable 
to each bank or loan account.

Foreign currencies
For the purposes of the consolidated 
financial statements, the results 
and financial position of each Group 
company are expressed in pounds 
sterling, which is the functional currency 
of the Company, and the presentation 
currency for the consolidated 
financial statements.

In preparing the financial statements of 
the individual companies, transactions 
in currencies other than the entity’s 
functional currency (foreign currencies) 
are recorded at the rates of exchange 
prevailing on the dates of transactions. 
At each year-end date, monetary assets 
and liabilities that are denominated 
in foreign currencies are retranslated 
at the rates prevailing on the 
year-end date.

For the purpose of presenting 
consolidated financial statements, 
the assets and liabilities of the Group’s 
foreign operations are translated 
at exchange rates prevailing on the 
year-end date. Income and expense 
items are translated at the average 
exchange rate for the period, which 
approximates to the rate applicable 
at the dates of the transactions. 

The exchange differences arising from 
the retranslation of the year-end 
amounts of foreign subsidiaries and 
the difference on translation of the 
results of those subsidiaries into the 
presentational currency of the Group 
are recognised in the translation 
reserve. All other exchange differences 
are dealt with through the consolidated 
income statement.

Highlighted items
Highlighted items comprise non-cash 
charges and non-recurring items which 
are highlighted in the consolidated 
income statement as separate 
disclosure is considered by the Directors 
to be relevant in understanding the 
underlying performance of the business. 
The non-cash charges include share 
option charges and amortisation of 
purchased intangibles. 

The non-recurring items include 
the costs associated with potential 
acquisitions (where formal discussion 
is undertaken), completed acquisitions 
and disposals, and their subsequent 
integration into/separation from the 
Group, adjustments to the estimates 
of contingent consideration on 
acquired entities, asset impairment 
charges, management restructuring 
and other significant one-off items. 
Costs associated with ongoing market 
landscaping, acquisition identification 
and early stage discussions with 
acquisition targets are reported in 
underlying administrative expenses. 

Taxation
The tax expense included in the 
consolidated income statement 
comprises current and deferred tax. 
Current tax is the expected tax payable 
on the taxable income for the period, 
using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted by the year-end date.

The Group is subject to corporate 
taxes in a number of different 
jurisdictions and judgement is required 
in determining the appropriate provision 
for transactions where the ultimate 
tax determination is uncertain. In such 
circumstances, the Group recognises 
liabilities for anticipated taxes based 
on the best information available and 
where the anticipated liability is both 
probable and estimable. Where the final 
outcome of such matters differs from 
the amount recorded, any differences 
may impact the income tax and 
deferred tax provisions in the period in 
which the final determination is made.

Tax is recognised in the consolidated 
income statement except to the extent 
that it relates to items recognised 
directly in equity or other comprehensive 
income, in which case it is recognised 
in equity. 

Using the liability method, deferred tax 
is provided on all temporary differences 
between the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities for financial 
reporting purposes and their tax bases, 
except for differences arising on:

•  the initial recognition of goodwill;

•  the initial recognition of an asset 

or liability in a transaction which is 
not a business combination and at 
the time of the transaction affects 
neither accounting nor taxable profit; 
and

• 

investments in subsidiaries and 
jointly controlled entities where the 
Group is able to control the timing of 
the reversal of the difference and it is 
probable that the difference will not 
reverse in the foreseeable future.

Recognition of deferred tax assets is 
restricted to those instances where it 
is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the difference 
can be utilised. The recognition of 
deferred tax assets is reviewed at each 
year-end date.

The amount of the asset or liability is 
determined using tax rates that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted 
by the year-end date and are expected 
to apply when the deferred tax 
liabilities/assets are settled/recovered.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are 
offset when the Group has a legally 
enforceable right to offset current tax 
assets and liabilities and the deferred 
tax assets and liabilities relate to taxes 
levied by the same tax authority on 
either:

•  the same taxable Group company; or

•  different Group entities which intend 
either to settle current tax assets 
and liabilities on a net basis, or to 
realise the assets and settle the 
liabilities simultaneously, in each 
future period in which significant 
amounts of deferred tax assets or 
liabilities are expected to be settled 
or recovered.

69

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

1. Accounting policies continued
Taxation continued
Taxation has been allocated to the 
discontinued operation by taking 
each element in turn and attributing 
the appropriate portion accordingly. 
This includes the allocation of 
adjustments to profit before tax to 
determine the profits chargeable to 
corporation tax and then applying the 
taxation charge from each jurisdiction 
respectively. For deferred taxation, each 
asset and liability was reviewed and the 
AdIntel related items were carved out 
from the Group items.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated 
at cost less accumulated depreciation 
and any recognised impairment loss.

Depreciation is charged so as to 
write off the cost of assets over their 
estimated useful economic lives. 
The rates applied are as follows:

Motor vehicles 

Fixtures, fittings,  
and equipment 

25% per annum  

reducing balance

Five to 14 years 
straight-line;  
or 25% per annum  
reducing balance

Computer equipment  Two to four years 
straight-line

Leasehold land  
and buildings 
improvements 

Over the shorter 
of the life or the 
estimated useful 
life of the lease

Other intangible assets
Internally generated intangible assets – 
development expenditure
Internally generated intangible 
assets relate to bespoke computer 
software and technology developed 
by the Group’s internal software 
development team. During the year, 
the Group generated £1,203,000 of 
internally generated intangible assets 
(31 December 2018: £1,084,000).

An internally generated intangible asset 
arising from the Group’s development 
expenditure is recognised only if all of 
the following conditions are met:

• 

it is technically feasible to develop 
the asset so that it will be available 
for use or sale;

•  adequate resources are available to 
complete the development and to 
use or sell the asset;

70

•  there is an intention to complete the 

asset for use or sale;

•  the Group is able to use or sell the 

intangible asset; 

• 

it is probable that the asset created 
will generate future economic 
benefits; and

•  the development cost of the asset 

can be measured reliably.

Internally generated intangible assets 
are amortised on a straight-line basis 
over their useful lives. Amortisation 
commences when the asset is available 
for use and useful lives range from one 
to five years. The amortisation expense 
is included within administrative 
expenses. Where an internally 
generated intangible asset cannot be 
recognised, development expenditure is 
recognised as an expense in the period 
in which it is incurred.

Purchased intangible assets
Externally acquired intangible 
assets are initially recognised at cost 
and subsequently amortised on a 
straight-line basis over their useful 
economic lives, which vary from three 
to 10 years. The amortisation expense 
is included as a highlighted item within 
the administrative expenses line in the 
income statement. 

Intangible assets recognised on business 
combinations are recorded at fair 
value at the acquisition date using 
appropriate valuation techniques where 
they are separable from the acquired 
entity or give rise to other contractual/
legal rights. The significant intangibles 
recognised by the Group are customer 
relationships, which are amortised on a 
straight-line basis over a typical useful 
life of 10 years.

Computer software
Purchased computer software 
intangible assets are amortised on a 
straight-line basis over their useful lives, 
which vary from two to eight years.

Impairment
Assets that have an indefinite useful life 
are not subject to amortisation and are 
tested annually for impairment. 

For the purpose of impairment testing, 
goodwill is grouped at the lowest 
levels for which there are separately 
identifiable cash flows, known as 
cash-generating units. If the recoverable 
amount of the cash-generating unit is 
less than the carrying amount of the 
unit, the impairment loss is allocated 
first to reduce the carrying amount of 
any goodwill allocated to the unit and 
then to the other assets of the unit 
pro-rata on the basis of the carrying 
amount of each asset in the unit.

Assets that are subject to amortisation 
or depreciation are reviewed for 
impairment whenever events or 
changes in circumstances indicate 
that the carrying amount may not be 
recoverable. If any such condition exists, 
the recoverable amount of the asset 
is estimated in order to determine the 
extent, if any, of the impairment loss. 
Where the asset does not generate cash 
flows that are independent from other 
assets, estimates are made of the cash 
flows of the cash-generating unit to 
which the asset belongs.

Recoverable amount is the higher of fair 
value, less costs to sell, and value-in-use. 
In assessing value-in-use, estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their 
present value using a pre-tax discount 
rate appropriate to the specific asset or 
cash-generating unit.

If the recoverable amount of an asset 
or cash-generating unit is estimated 
to be less than its carrying amount, 
the carrying value of the asset or 
cash-generating unit is reduced to 
its recoverable amount. Impairment 
losses are recognised immediately 
in highlighted items in the income 
statement. 

In respect of assets other than goodwill, 
an impairment loss is reversed if there 
has been a change in the estimates 
used to determine the recoverable 
amount. An impairment loss is reversed 
only to the extent that the asset’s 
carrying amount does not exceed the 
carrying amount that would have 
been determined, net of depreciation 
or amortisation, if no impairment loss 
had been recognised. 

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
cash in hand and short-term deposits. 
Cash and cash equivalents and bank 
overdrafts are offset when there is a 
legally enforceable right to offset.

Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities 
are recognised in the Group’s statement 
of financial position when the Group 
becomes a party to the contractual 
provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial assets 
as ‘loans and receivables’. Loans and 
receivables are non-derivative financial 
assets with fixed or determinable 
payments that are not quoted in an 
active market. They arise principally 
through the provision of goods 
and services to customers (trade 
receivables), but also incorporate other 
types of contractual monetary assets. 
They are initially recognised at fair 
value plus transaction costs that are 
directly attributable to their acquisition 
or issue, and are subsequently carried 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest rate method, less provision for 
impairment.

Impairment provisions are recognised 
when there is objective evidence (such 
as significant financial difficulties on 
the part of the counterparty or default 
or significant delay in payment) that 
the Group will be unable to collect all 
of the amounts due, the amount of 
such a provision being the difference 
between the net carrying amount and 
the present value of the future expected 
cash flows associated with the impaired 
receivable. For trade receivables, which 
are reported net, such provisions are 
recorded in a separate allowance 
account with the loss being recognised 
within administrative expenses in the 
income statement. On confirmation 
that the trade receivable will not be 
collectable, the gross carrying value 
of the asset is written off against the 
associated provision.

Financial liabilities
Borrowings consisting of 
interest-bearing secured and 
unsecured loans and overdrafts are 
initially recognised at fair value net of 
directly attributable transaction costs 
incurred and subsequently measured 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method. The difference 
between the proceeds received net of 
transaction costs and the redemption 
amount is amortised over the period 
of the borrowings to which they relate. 
The revolving credit facility is considered 
to be a long-term loan.

Trade and other payables are initially 
recognised at their nominal value, which 
is usually the original invoiced amount. 

Leases 
Prior to the adoption of IFRS 16 on 
1 January 2019, the Group accounted for 
leases in accordance with the principles 
of IAS 17 'Leases'. Where substantially 
all of the risks and rewards incidental to 
ownership of a leased asset have been 
transferred to the Group (a ‘finance 
lease’), the asset is treated as if it had 
been purchased outright. The amount 
initially recognised as an asset is the 
lower of the fair value of the leased 
property and the present value of the 
minimum lease payments payable over 
the term of the lease. The corresponding 
lease commitment is shown as a liability. 
Lease payments are analysed between 
capital and interest. The interest 
element is charged to the income 
statement over the period of the lease 
and is calculated so that it represents a 
constant proportion of the lease liability. 
The capital element reduces the balance 
owed to the lessor.

Where substantially all of the risks and 
rewards incidental to ownership are 
retained by the lessor (an ‘operating 
lease’), the total rentals payable under 
the lease are charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term. The aggregate 
benefit of lease incentives is recognised 
as a reduction of the rental expense 
over the lease term on a straight-line 
basis. The land and buildings elements 
of property leases are considered 
separately for the purposes of lease 
classification.

Share capital
Equity instruments issued by the 
Group are recorded at the amount 
of the proceeds received, net of direct 
issuance costs.

Executive Share Option Plan  
(‘ESOP’)
As the Company is deemed to have 
control of its ESOP trust, it is treated 
as a subsidiary and consolidated for 
the purposes of the Group financial 
statements. The ESOP’s assets (other 
than investments in the Company’s 
shares), liabilities, income and expenses 
are included on a line-by-line basis in the 
Group financial statements. The ESOP’s 
investment in the Company’s shares 
is deducted from shareholders’ equity 
in the Group statement of financial 
position as if they were treasury shares.

Share-based payments
Where equity-settled share options are 
awarded to employees, the fair value 
of the options at the date of grant is 
charged to the income statement over 
the vesting period with a corresponding 
increase recognised in retained 
earnings. Fair value is measured using 
an appropriate valuation model. 
Non-market vesting conditions are 
taken into account by adjusting the 
number of equity investments expected 
to vest at each year-end date so that, 
ultimately, the cumulative amount 
recognised over the vesting period is 
based on the number of options that 
eventually vest. A charge is made 
irrespective of whether the market 
vesting conditions are satisfied. 
The cumulative expense is not adjusted 
for failure to achieve a market 
vesting condition.

Where there are modifications to 
share-based payments that are 
beneficial to the employee, then as 
well as continuing to recognise the 
original share-based payment charge, 
the incremental fair value of the 
modified share options as identified 
at the date of the modification is also 
charged to the income statement 
over the remaining vesting period. 
Where the Group cancels share options 
and identifies replacement options, 
this arrangement is also accounted for 
as a modification.

71

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

1. Accounting policies continued
Share-based payments continued
The grant by the Company of options 
over its equity instruments to the 
employees of subsidiary undertakings 
in the Group is treated as a capital 
contribution. 

The fair value of employee services 
received, measured by reference to the 
grant date fair value, is recognised over 
the vesting period as an increase to 
investment in subsidiary undertakings, 
with a corresponding credit to equity in 
the parent entity financial statements.

Provisions
Provisions, including provisions for 
onerous lease costs, are recognised 
when the Group has a present legal 
or constructive obligation as a result 
of past events, it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required 
to settle that obligation and the 
amount can be reliably estimated. 
Provisions are not recognised for future 
operating losses.

Provisions are measured at the 
Directors’ best estimate of the 
expenditure required to settle the 
obligation at the year-end date. If the 
effect of the time value of money is 
material, provisions are determined by 
discounting the expected future cash 
flows at a pre-tax rate which reflects 
current market assessments of the time 
value of money and, where appropriate, 
the risks specific to the obligations.

Retirement benefits
For defined contribution pension 
schemes, the Group pays contributions 
to privately administered pension 
plans on a voluntary basis. The Group 
has no further payment obligations 
once the contributions have been 
paid. Contributions are charged to the 
income statement in the year to which 
they relate.

Dividend distribution
Dividend distribution to the Company’s 
shareholders is recognised as a 
liability in the Group’s financial 
statements in the period in which 
the dividends are approved by the 
Company’s shareholders.

72

Critical accounting 
estimates and judgements
In preparing the consolidated financial 
statements, the Directors have made 
certain estimates and judgements 
relating to the reporting of results 
of operations and the financial 
position of the Group. Actual results 
may significantly differ from those 
estimates, often as a result of the need 
to make assumptions about matters 
which are uncertain. The estimates 
and judgements discussed below are 
considered by the Directors to be those 
that have a critical accounting impact 
to the Group’s financial statements.

Critical accounting estimates include 
the terminal growth rate used in 
impairment assessments, inputs to 
share option accounting fair value 
models and amounts to capitalise as 
intangible assets. These estimates are 
reached with reference to historical 
experience, supporting detailed 
analysis and, in the case of impairment 
assessments and share option 
accounting, external economic factors. 

Critical accounting judgements 
include the treatment of events after 
the reporting period as adjusting or 
non-adjusting and the determination 
of segments for segmental reporting, 
based on the reports reviewed by the 
Executive Directors that are used 
to make strategic decisions. These 
judgements are determined at a Board 
level based on the status of strategic 
initiatives of the Group.

Carrying value of goodwill and 
other intangible assets
Impairment testing requires 
management to estimate the 
value-in-use of the cash-generating 
units to which goodwill and other 
intangible assets have been allocated. 
The value-in-use calculation 
requires estimation of future cash 
flows expected to arise from the 
cash-generating unit and the 
application of a suitable discount rate 
in order to calculate present value. 
The sensitivity around the selection of 
particular assumptions including growth 
forecasts and the pre-tax discount 
rate used in management’s cash flow 
projections could significantly affect 
the Group’s impairment evaluation and 
therefore the Group’s reported assets 
and results. 

Further details, including a sensitivity 
analysis, are included in notes 10 
and 11 to the consolidated financial 
statements.

Contingent consideration
The Group has recorded liabilities for 
contingent consideration on acquisitions 
made in the current and prior periods. 
The calculation of the contingent 
consideration liability requires 
judgements to be made regarding 
the forecast future performance of 
these businesses for the earn-out 
period. Any changes to the fair value 
of the contingent consideration 
after the measurement period are 
recognised in the income statement 
within administrative expenses as a 
highlighted item.

Taxation
The Group is subject to income taxes in 
all the territories in which it operates, 
and judgement and estimates of 
future profitability are required to 
determine the Group’s deferred tax 
position. If the final tax outcome is 
different to that assumed, resulting 
changes will be reflected in the income 
statement, unless the tax relates to an 
item charged to equity, in which case 
the changes in the tax estimates will 
also be reflected in equity. The Group 
believes that its accruals for tax 
liabilities are adequate for all open 
audit years based on its assessment of 
many factors including past experience 
and interpretations of tax law. This 
assessment relies on estimates and 
assumptions and may involve a series 
of complex judgements about future 
events. To the extent that the final tax 
outcome of these matters is different 
than the amounts recorded, such 
differences will impact income tax 
expense in the period in which such 
determination is made.

Provisions
The Group provides for certain costs of 
reorganisation that has occurred due 
to the Group’s acquisition and disposal 
activity. When the final amount payable 
is uncertain, these are classified as 
provisions. These provisions are based 
on the best estimates of management.

Ebiquity plcAdoption of new standards and interpretations
On 1 January 2019, the Group adopted the following amendments which are effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 
1 January 2019. IFRS 16 has been applied in these financial statements using the modified retrospective method, meaning the 
comparatives have not been restated to reflect the effects of IFRS 16.

On adoption of IFRS 16, the Group recognised lease liabilities in relation to leases which had previously been classified as 
‘operating leases’ under the principles of IAS 17 'Leases'. These liabilities were measured at the present value of the remaining 
lease payments, discounted using the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate as of 1 January 2019. The weighted average lessee’s 
incremental borrowing rate applied to the lease liabilities on 1 January 2019 was 3.17%.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ (effective on or after 1 January 2019). This standard replaces IAS 17 ‘Leases’ and related interpretations and 
sets out the principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases for both the lessee and the lessor. 
The standard addresses the definition of a lease, recognition and measurement of leases, and it establishes principles for reporting 
useful information to users of financial statements about the leasing activities of both lessees and lessors. A key change arising 
from IFRS 16 is that most operating leases will be accounted for on the statement of financial position for lessees. The operating 
lease charge is replaced by a depreciation charge and an interest charge. IFRS 16 eliminates the two lease classifications that IAS 
17 has (operating and finance leases) for the lessee, and instead all leases will have the same classification.

Reconciliation of operating lease commitments as at 31 December 2018 to lease liabilities recognised as at 1 January 2019:

Operating lease commitments disclosed as at 31 December 2018 

Discounted using the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate of 3.17% at the date of initial application 

(Less): short-term leases not recognised as a liability 

(Less): leases part of the AdIntel sale    

Add: contracts reassessed as lease contracts 

(Less): change in lease term 

Lease liabilities recognised as at 1 January 2019 

Of which are: 

Current lease liabilities 

Non-current lease liabilities 

Total 
£’000

8,351

8,095

(554)

(1,429)

56

(417)

5,751

969

4,782

5,751

The standard requires the Group to recognise a ‘right-of-use’ asset, representing the right to use the underlying asset, and a 
corresponding lease liability, representing the obligation to make lease payments, on its statement of financial position, for almost 
all lease contracts. 

The impact on the income statement is that former operating lease expenses are replaced by depreciation and interest, 
thereby improving EBITDA and operating profit. Total expenses (depreciation of right-of-use assets and interest on lease 
liabilities) are typically higher in the earlier years of a lease and lower in the later years, in comparison with former accounting 
for operating leases. 

The main impact on the statement of cash flows is higher cash flows from operating activities, since cash payments for the 
principal part of the lease liability are classified in the net cash flow from financing activities. 

The tax effect from the adjustments from IFRS 16 have been measured and recognised accordingly. 

73

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

1. Accounting policies continued
Adoption of new standards and interpretations continued
The change in accounting policy has impacted the primary statements as follows:

Operating lease rentals   

Depreciation charge 

Interest expense 

Highlighted items 

Right-of-use assets 

Impairment of right-of-use assets 

Lease liabilities 

Accruals 

Other debtors 

Deferred tax asset 

Cash flows from operating activities   

Cash flows from financing activities 

Total impact 

Income 
statement 
debit/ 
(credit) 

  Statement of  
financial  
position 
debit/ 
(credit) 

Cash flow 
statement 
inflow/ 
(outflow)

(1,437) 

1,595 

253 

462 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(152) 

— 

— 

721 

— 

(1,595) 

(253) 

— 

10,576 

(642) 

(9,337) 

952 

(574) 

152 

— 

— 

(721) 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1,192

(1,192)

—

Accounting policy for leases 
The Group has various lease arrangements for buildings, cars, and IT equipment. Lease terms are negotiated on an individual 
basis locally. This results in a wide range of different terms and conditions. At the inception of a lease contract, the Group assesses 
whether the contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a certain period in exchange for a consideration, 
in which case it is identified as a lease. The Group then recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability at the 
lease commencement date. Lease-related assets and liabilities are measured on a present value basis. Lease-related assets 
and liabilities are subjected to re-measurement when either terms are modified or lease assumptions have changed. Such an 
event results in the lease liability being re-measured to reflect the measurement of the present value of the remaining lease 
payments, discounted using the discount rate at the time of the change. The lease assets are adjusted to reflect the change in 
the re-measured liabilities. 

Right‑of‑use assets: 

Right-of-use assets include the net present value of the following components:

•  the initial measurement of the lease liability;

• 

• 

lease payments made before the commencement date of the lease; 

initial direct costs; and

•  costs to restore. 

The right-of-use assets are reduced for lease incentives relating to the lease. The right-of-use assets are depreciated on a 
straight-line basis over the duration of the contract. In the event that the lease contract becomes onerous, the right-of-use 
asset is impaired for the part which has become onerous.

Lease liabilities:

Lease liabilities include the net present value of the following components: 

•  fixed payments excluding lease incentive receivables;

•  future contractually agreed fixed increases; and

•  payments related to renewals or early termination, in case options to renew or for early termination are reasonably certain 

to be exercised. 

74

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease. If such rate cannot be determined, the lessee’s 
incremental borrowing rate is used, being the rate that the lessee would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to obtain 
an asset of similar value in a similar economic environment with similar terms and conditions. The discount rate that is used to 
calculate the present value reflects the interest rate applicable to the lease at inception of the contract. Lease contracts entered 
into in a currency different to the local functional currency are subjected to periodic foreign currency revaluations which are 
recognised in the income statement in net finance costs. 

The lease liabilities are subsequently increased by the interest costs on the lease liabilities and decreased by lease payments made.

Presentational change in income statement
During the year, the Group changed its accounting policy with respect to the classification of costs previously included within 
cost of sales. Cost of sales historically comprised external production costs, direct salary, commission and freelancer costs. The 
Group now records external production costs within a new cost line named project-related costs. On project-related costs being 
deducted from revenue, the result is net revenue. Direct salary, commission and freelancer costs remain to be recorded within 
costs of sales which is deducted from net revenue to get to gross profit.

The Group believes that this revised classification is more appropriate for the continuing consultancy-based business.

The impact of this voluntary change in accounting policy is purely presentational. There is no change to gross profit or operating 
profit in the consolidated financial statements and there are no further impacts in the consolidated financial statements.

The comparative income statement, for the year ended 31 December 2018, has been restated to reflect the change in accounting 
policy as detailed above. 

The change reflects a reclassification of external production costs of £8,813,000 to project-related costs, with net revenue of 
£60,555,000 resulting. Sales commission, direct salary costs and freelancer costs of £28,787,000 are then included within cost of 
sales, with gross profit of £31,768,000 resulting. This is no change from the gross profit reported in the 2018 financial statements. 
Administrative expenses remain unchanged and therefore the resulting underlying operating profit remains at £6,342,000.

The impact of the change in accounting policy is shown in the table below:

Revenue 

Project-related costs 

Net revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Administrative expenses  

Operating profit 

Year ended 31 Dec 2018 

Before  

highlighted   Highlighted 
items 
£’000 

items 
£’000 

69,368 

— 

 — 

(37,600) 

31,768 

(25,426) 

6,342 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(7,695) 

(7,695) 

Total 
£’000 

69,368 

— 

— 

69,368 

(8,813) 

60,555 

(37,600) 

(28,787) 

31,768 

31,768 

(33,121) 

(25,426) 

(1,353) 

6,342 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(7,695) 

(7,695) 

Year ended 31 Dec 2018 
(reclassified) 

Before 

 highlighted  Highlighted 
items 
£’000 

items 
£’000 

Impact 
of re- 
classification

Total 
£’000 

69,368 

Total 
£’000

—

(8,813) 

(8,813)

60,555 

60,555

(28,787) 

8,813

31,768 

(33,121) 

(1,353) 

—

—

—

2. Segmental reporting
In accordance with IFRS 8, the Group’s operating segments are based on the reports reviewed by the Executive Directors that are 
used to make strategic decisions.

Certain operating segments have been aggregated to form three reportable segments: Media, Analytics & Tech and 
Discontinued operations:

•  Media includes our Media Performance, Media Management and Contract Compliance services;

•  Analytics & Tech consists of our Advanced Analytics, MarTech and AdTech services; and

•  Discontinued operations comprise Intel, the advertising monitoring service and the Reputation management and 

research services.

The Executive Directors are the Group’s chief operating decision-maker. They assess the performance of the operating segments 
based on operating profit before highlighted items. This measurement basis excludes the effects of non-recurring expenditure 
from the operating segments such as restructuring costs and purchased intangible amortisation. The measure also excludes the 
effects of equity-settled share-based payments. Interest income and expenditure are not allocated to segments, as this type of 
activity is driven by the central treasury function, which manages the cash position of the Group.

75

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

2. Segmental reporting continued
The segment information provided to the Executive Directors for the reportable segments for the year ended 31 December 2019 
is as follows:

Year ended 31 December 2019

  Analytics & 
Tech 
£’000 

Media 
£’000 

Reportable  

segments  Unallocated 
£’000 

£’000 

  Discontinued 
operations 
£’000 

Revenue 

Operating profit/(loss) before highlighted items 

Total assets 

54,585 

11,845 

69,382 

14,148 

966 

68,733 

12,811 

11,581 

80,963 

— 

(6,644) 

1,919 

— 

— 

— 

Unsatisfied long-term contracts
The following table shows unsatisfied performance obligations results from long-term contracts:

Total 
£’000

68,733

6,167

82,882

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Aggregate amount of the transaction price allocated to long-term  
contracts that are partially or fully unsatisfied as at 31 December 2019 

304 

2,152

It is expected that 97% of the transaction price allocated to the unsatisfied contracts as of 31 December 2019 will be recognised 
during the next reporting period (31 December 2018: 68%); the remaining 3% will be recognised in the 2021 financial year 
(31 December 2018: 32% to be recognised in 2020). 

Significant changes in contract assets and liabilities
Contract assets have increased from £8,003,000 to £9,366,000 and contract liabilities have increased from £3,979,000 to 
£4,635,000 from 31 December 2018 to 31 December 2019.

Year ended 31 December 2018

Revenue 

Operating profit/(loss) before highlighted items 

Total assets 

Media 
£’000 

54,179 

12,073 

60,832 

Analytics & 
Tech 
£’000 

Reportable  

segments  Unallocated 
£’000 

£’000 

15,189 

1,401 

14,176 

69,368 

13,474 

75,008 

  Discontinued 
operations 
£’000 

— 

20,260 

988 

(7,129) 

8,593 

Total 
£’000

89,628

7,333

27,734 

111,335

A reconciliation of segment operating profit before highlighted items to total profit before tax is provided below:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Reportable segment operating profit before highlighted items 

Unallocated costs1: 

Staff costs  

Property costs 

Exchange rate movements 

Other administrative expenses 

Operating profit before highlighted items 

Highlighted items (note 3) 

Operating loss 

Net finance costs 

(Loss) before tax 

1.  Unallocated costs comprise central costs that are not considered attributable to the segments.

12,811 

13,474

(3,428) 

(4,794)

(1,513) 

(208) 

(1,495) 

6,167 

(10,330) 

(4,163) 

(898) 

(322)

121

(2,137)

6,342

(7,695)

(1,353)

(1,151)

(5,061) 

(2,504)

76

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A reconciliation of segment total assets to total consolidated assets is provided below:

Total assets for reportable segments  

Unallocated amounts: 

Property, plant and equipment 

Other intangible assets   

Other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Deferred tax asset 

Total assets 

The table below presents revenue and non-current assets by geographical location:

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

80,963 

102,742

— 

642 

868 

332 

77 

448

815

1,654

5,034

642

82,882 

111,335

Year ended 
31 December 2019 

Year ended 
31 December 2018

Revenue by 
location of  Non‑current 
assets 
customers 
£’000 
£’000 

Revenue by 
location of  Non-current 
assets 
customers 
£’000
£’000 

United Kingdom 

Rest of Europe 

North America 

Rest of world 

Deferred tax assets 

Total 

27,802 

26,009 

44,078

33,176 

18,783 

8,951 

7,823 

7,402 

3,416 

7,454 

68,733 

46,074 

— 

986 

33,113 

18,345 

12,161 

89,628 

— 

9,221

6,820

12,116

72,235

1,019

73,254

68,733 

47,060 

89,628 

No single customer (or group of related customers) contributes 10% or more of revenue.

3. Highlighted items
Highlighted items comprise items which are highlighted in the income statement because separate disclosure is considered 
relevant in understanding the underlying performance of the business.

Administrative expenses  

Share option (credit)/charge 

Amortisation of purchased intangibles 

Impairment of goodwill   

Severance and reorganisation costs 

Acquisition, integration and strategic costs 

Total highlighted items before tax 

Taxation (credit)/charge   

Total highlighted items after tax  
– continuing operations   

Highlighted items – discontinued operations 

Total highlighted items 

Year ended 
31 December 2019 

Year ended 
31 December 2018

Cash 
£’000 

Non‑cash 
£’000 

Total 
£’000 

Cash 
£’000 

Non-cash 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

(78) 

— 

— 

1,333 

998 

2,253 

(536) 

1,717 

2,521 

4,238 

195 

1,169 

6,751 

— 

(38) 

117 

1,169 

6,751 

1,333 

960 

8,077 

10,330 

(127) 

— 

— 

826 

2,050 

2,749 

82 

(454) 

(242) 

8,159 

(1,503) 

9,876 

1,018 

6,656 

10,894 

2,507 

982 

3,489 

350 

1,240 

2,607 

331 

419 

4,947 

448 

5,395 

507 

5,902 

223

1,240

2,607

1,157

2,469

7,696

206

7,902

1,489

9,391

Amortisation of purchased intangibles relates to acquisitions made in the current financial year of £nil and to acquisitions made in 
prior years of £1,169,000 (31 December 2018: £nil in the current financial year and £1,240,000 in prior years). Separate disclosure is 
considered relevant because amortisation of purchased intangibles has no correlation to underlying profitability of the Group.

77

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

3. Highlighted items continued
In the current year, a non-cash IFRS 2 charge of £195,000 (31 December 2018: £350,000) was recorded. Separate disclosure is 
considered relevant to isolate charges and credits which are subject to volatility as a result of non-trading factors.

Impairment of goodwill and intangibles of £6,751,000 (2018: £2,607,000) has been recognised in the year. £5,844,000 is in relation 
to the impairment of goodwill, purchased intangibles and internally generated intangibles held in Stratigent LLC. The impairment 
was determined with reference to the current net book value of these items, the result being that these items have been fully 
written down due to the winding down of the activities of this operation. A further impairment of £907,000 was recognised 
in relation to the goodwill held in Digital Balance Australia Pty Limited; the impairment was determined, and is equal to, the 
downward revision of the contingent consideration payable.

Total severance and reorganisation costs of £1,333,000 (31 December 2018: £1,157,000) were recognised during the year, relating 
to severances in the UK, the US and Germany as part of management restructuring in those countries. Separate disclosure is 
considered relevant as these charges are non-recurring and not reflective of the underlying operating costs of the business.

Total acquisition, integration and strategic costs of £960,000 (31 December 2018: £2,469,000) were recognised during the year, 
primarily consisting of £641,000 being the recognition of, and movement in the year of, impairment to the right-of-use assets 
recognised in relation to the London, Chicago, Sydney, and Hamburg office leases in accordance with IFRS 16. A further £501,000 
was incurred in relation to one-off costs associated with the relocation to the new London premises and £262,000 was incurred in 
relation to office costs incurred on vacated office space in Hamburg, Sydney, and Chicago. £257,000 was then incurred in relation 
to the refinancing of the loan facility. Costs of £78,000 were also recognised in relation to the acquisition of Digital Decisions B.V, 
which completed on 8 January 2020; see note 34 for further details. Partially offsetting this is the adjustment to the fair value of 
contingent consideration amounting to a credit of £779,000, predominantly arising in relation to the downward revision of the 
amounts payable in relation to the Digital Balance Australia Pty Limited acquisition. Separate disclosure is considered relevant as 
these charges are non-recurring and not reflective of the underlying operating costs of the business.

Current tax arising on the highlighted items is included as a cash item, while deferred tax on highlighted items is included as a 
non-cash item. Refer to note 7 for more detail.

Highlighted items on discontinued operations in the current year comprise the profits on disposal of the AdIntel and the Reputation 
business respectively of £1,408,000 and £36,000 and the tax charge arising thereon of £2,462,000.

As at 31 December 2019, £1,526,000 of the £2,254,000 cash highlighted items had been settled (31 December 2018: £1,043,000 
of the £2,749,000 cash highlighted items had been settled).

4. Operating profit after highlighted items
Operating profit after highlighted items is stated after charging/(crediting):

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Operating lease rentals1   

– other 

– land and buildings 

Depreciation and amortisation (notes 11, 12 and 13)2 

Impairment of goodwill (note 10) 

Impairment of intangibles (note 11) 

Contingent consideration revaluations (note 3) 

Income on transitional services agreement  

Loss on disposal of fixed assets 

Research costs – expensed 

Foreign exchange loss/(gain) 

1.  Operating lease rentals have reduced by £1,437,000 on adoption of IFRS 16.

2.  Depreciation in the current year includes £1,596,000 on adoption of IFRS 16.

— 

670 

4,205 

5,989 

761 

(779) 

(1,273) 

40 

93 

205 

134

2,328

2,785

2,607

—

95

—

17

542

(103)

78

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Auditors’ remuneration
During the year, the Group (including its overseas subsidiaries) obtained the following services from the Group’s auditors at costs 
as detailed below:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of the parent company and  
consolidated financial statements 

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors and its associates for other services:  

– other audit-related assurance services 

– other assurance services 

– tax compliance services 

299 

250

52  

—  

21  

372 

30

2

28

310

5. Employee information
The monthly average number of employees employed by the Group during the year, including Executive Directors, was as follows:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
Number

2019 
Number 

Media  

Analytics & Tech 

IT development and support 

Administration 

Directors 

Number of employees employed by continuing operations 

Number of employees employed by discontinued operations 

341 

117 

22 

83 

7 

570 

— 

570 

335

110

31

94

8

578

348

926

At 31 December 2019, the total number of employees of the Group employed by continuing operations was 555 (31 December 2018: 
574); including discontinued operations in the prior year this was 905.

Staff costs for all employees, including Executive Directors, consist of:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Other pension costs 

Share options charge (note 26) 

Total staff costs from continuing operations 

Staff costs from discontinued operations 

Total staff costs 

35,075 

4,027 

815 

194 

40,111 

— 

40,111 

37,135

3,632

780

394

41,941

10,160

52,101

Directors’ remuneration
Total Directors’ remuneration was £856,000, including £362,000 to the highest paid Director (31 December 2018: £1,432,000 
including £416,000 to the highest paid Director). Directors are eligible for cash bonuses as a percentage of base salary, dependent 
on individual and Company performance against established financial targets. £nil performance bonuses were paid during the 
year (31 December 2018: £nil). No retention bonuses were payable to any Directors (31 December 2018: £152,000).

One Director stepped down as a director on 12 November 2019 and his employment ceased on 31 December 2019. His salary 
during the period was £400,000 per annum and he received £19,000 of taxable benefits. In January 2020, he received a payment 
totalling £513,000 in lieu of base salary, pension and healthcare benefits for his notice period, his accrued but untaken holiday and 
in settlement of other provisions in connection with cessation of employment. 

79

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

5. Employee information continued
Directors’ remuneration continued
No Directors were a member of a Company pension scheme as at 31 December 2019 (31 December 2018: none). Contributions 
totalling £40,000 (31 December 2018: £32,000) were made to Directors’ private pension schemes during the year, including 
£40,000 to the highest paid Director (31 December 2018: £25,000).

No Directors exercised share options during the year (31 December 2018: 40,295). The highest paid Director exercised no share 
options (31 December 2018: nil).

During the year, 410,000 (31 December 2018: 1,650,000) share options were granted to Directors under the Group’s Executive 
Incentive Plan scheme. Vesting is subject to the satisfaction of certain performance criteria (see note 25 for further details).

Further details on Directors’ remuneration can be found in the Remuneration Committee report on pages 43 to 48.

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

9 

9 

(600) 

(54) 

(253) 

(907) 

25

25

(1,116)

(60)

—

(1,176)

Year ended 
31 December 2019 

Year ended 
31 December 2018

Before 

highlighted  Highlighted 
items 
£’000 

items 
£’000 

Before 

Total 
£’000 

highlighted  Highlighted 
items 
£’000 

items 
£’000 

298 

494 

792 

1,404 

120 

1,524 

2,316 

(383) 

— 

(383) 

(153) 

— 

(153) 

(536) 

(85) 

494 

409 

1,251 

120 

1,371 

1,780 

795 

148 

943 

806 

170 

976 

1,919 

(295) 

(90) 

1,931 

82 

— 

(213) 

(90) 

(454) 

1,477 

86 

(227) 

1,778 

(148) 

— 

(148) 

(94) 

— 

(94) 

(242) 

449 

— 

207 

Total 
£’000

647

148

795

712

170

882

1,677

535

(227)

1,985

6. Finance income and expenses

Finance income 

Bank interest 

Finance income 

Finance expenses 

Bank loans and overdraft interest 

Loan fee amortisation 

Lease liabilities’ interest   

Finance expenses 

7. Taxation charge/(credit)

UK tax 

Current year 

Adjustment in respect of prior year 

Foreign tax  

Current year 

Adjustment in respect of prior year 

Total current tax 

Deferred tax 

Origination and reversal of  
temporary differences (note 22) 

Adjustment in respect of prior year 

Total tax charge/(credit)  

80

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The difference between tax as charged in the financial statements and tax at the nominal rate is explained below:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Loss before tax 

Corporation tax at 19.00% (31 December 2018: 19.00%) 

Non-deductible taxable expenses 

Overseas tax rate differential 

Overseas losses not recognised 

Losses utilised not previously recognised 

Adjustment in respect of prior years 

Total tax charge 

(5,061) 

(2,501)

(962) 

1,139 

361 

149 

266 

524 

(475)

1,602

204

563

—

91

1,477 

1,985

Following the Budget on 11 March 2020, the corporation tax rate effective from 1 April 2020 and 1 April 2021 will remain at 19%. 
This supersedes the announcement on 6 September 2016 which detailed a reduction to 17% from 1 April 2020. 

The table below shows a reconciliation of the current tax liability for each year end:

At 1 January 2018 

Corporation tax payments 

Corporation tax refunds  

Under-provision in relation to prior years 

Provision for the year ended 31 December 2018 

Foreign exchange 

At 31 December 2018 

Corporation tax payments 

Corporation tax refunds  

Under-provision in relation to prior years 

Provision for the year ended 31 December 20191 

Foreign exchange  

At 31 December 2019 

1.  The provision for the current year includes £2,462,000 in relation to the discontinued operation.

£’000

1,598

(2,287)

334

321

1,344

48

1,358

(1,499)

151

614

3,629

(101)

4,152

81

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

8. Discontinued operations
On 12 February 2018, the Group agreed to dispose of the AdIntel business to Nielsen for gross consideration of £26,000,000. 
This disposal was completed on 2 January 2019. The gross consideration was dependent upon a working capital target position 
at the date of completion. The working capital acquired by Nielsen was below this target and a resulting repayment was made 
to Nielsen of £1,155,000 on 31 October 2019; net consideration was therefore £24,845,000. The results of this division have been 
presented within discontinued operations as appropriate.

On 19 March 2018, the Group entered into an agreement to sell the business assets of its Reputation division to Echo Research 
Holdings Limited. Completion took place on 31 March 2018. The consideration payable was dependent upon the revenue 
performance of the business during the 12 months following completion. The consideration resulting was £36,000, half of which 
was paid in the year and the balance is payable in June 2020. The results of this division have been presented within discontinued 
operations as appropriate.

The financial performance and cash flow information presented below reflects the AdIntel results for the year ended 
31 December 2018 and the profit on disposal recognised in 2019 on the sale completing on 2 January 2019, and the Reputation 
results for the three months to 31 March 2018, the profit on disposal recognised in 2018 and the contingent consideration 
recognised in 2019.

The table below summarises the income statement for the discontinued business units for both the current and the prior year:

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Administrative expenses  

Impairment of asset held for sale 

Operating profit/(loss) 

Highlighted items 

(Loss) before tax 

Tax 

Net result from discontinued operations 

Year ended 
31 December 2019 

Year ended 
31 December 2018

AdIntel 
£’000 

Reputation 
£’000 

Total 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(1,408) 

(1,408) 

2,455 

1,047 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(36) 

(36) 

7 

(29) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(1,444) 

(1,444) 

2,462 

1,018 

AdIntel 
£’000 

20,074 

(11,999) 

8,075 

(6,681) 

(297) 

1,097 

(1,879) 

(782) 

12 

(770) 

Reputation 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

186 

20,260

(203) 

(12,202)

(17) 

(92) 

— 

(109) 

34 

(75) 

— 

(75) 

8,058

(6,773)

(297)

988

(1,845)

(857)

12

(845)

Below is a table summarising the cash flows from discontinued operations:

Cash generated from operations – continuing operations 

Cash generated from operations – discontinued operations 

Total cash generated from operations  

Cash used in investment activities – continuing operations 

Cash generated by/(used in) investment activities – discontinued operations 

Total cash generated by/(used in) investment activities 

Cash (used in)/generated by financing activities – continuing operations 

Cash generated by financing activities – discontinued operations 

Total cash (used in)/generated by financing activities 

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents – continuing operations 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents – discontinued operations 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

82

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

3,594 

— 

3,594 

1,999

2,612

4,611

(4,218) 

(2,461)

24,845 

20,627 

(22,195) 

— 

(22,195) 

(22,819) 

24,845 

2,026 

(181)

(2,642)

211

—

211

(251)

2,431

2,180

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Below is a table summarising the details of the sale of the divisions:

Cash received or receivable: 

Cash 

Decrease of consideration 

Total disposal consideration 

Carrying amount of net assets/(liabilities)  
sold (note 16) 

Costs to sell – current year 

Reclassification of foreign  
currency translation reserve 

Total  

Gain on sale before income tax  

Income tax charge on gain 

(Loss)/gain on sale after income tax 

Costs to sell – prior year   

(Loss)/gain on sale after income tax – total 

Year ended  
31 December 2019  

Year ended 
31 December 2018

AdIntel 
£’000 

Reputation 
£’000 

Total 
£’000 

AdIntel 
£’000 

Reputation 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

26,000 

(1,155) 

24,845 

23,060 

95 

282 

23,437 

1,408 

(2,455) 

(1,047) 

(3,176) 

(4,223) 

36 

— 

36 

— 

— 

— 

— 

36 

(7) 

29 

— 

29 

26,036 

(1,155) 

24,881 

23,060 

95 

282 

23,437 

1,444 

(2,462)1 

(1,018) 

(3,176) 

(4,194) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

—

(34) 

(34)

— 

— 

(34) 

34 

(11) 

23 

— 

23 

—

—

(34)

34

(11)

23

—

23

1.  The income tax charge on the gain on disposal is £2,462,000 and exceeds the gain on sale of £1,444,000 due primarily to the difference between 
accounting base costs and tax base costs for the assets sold. Certain goodwill and intangible balances recognised for accounting purposes do not 
have base costs for corporation tax purposes, therefore these items are not able to shield the gain from a tax perspective.

9. Earnings per share
The calculation of the basic and diluted earnings per share is based on the following data:

Earnings for the purpose of basic earnings  
per share being net profit attributable  
to equity holders of the parent 

Adjustments: 

Year ended 
31 December 2019 

Year ended 
31 December 2018

Continuing  Discontinued 
£’000 

£’000 

Total 
£’000 

Continuing  Discontinued 
£’000 

£’000 

Total 
£’000

(6,989) 

(1,018) 

(8,007) 

(4,985) 

(822) 

(5,806)

Impact of highlighted items (net of tax)1 

9,864 

1,018 

10,882 

7,887 

1,485 

9,371

Earnings for the purpose of  
underlying earnings per share 

Number of shares: 

Weighted average number  
of shares during the year  

– basic 

2,875 

— 

2,875 

2,902 

663 

3,565

 79,490,174  

 79,490,174  

 79,490,174   78,557,977  78,557,977  78,557,977

– dilutive effect of share options 

 1,155,106  

 1,155,106  

 1,155,106  

4,176,597 

4,176,597 

4,176,597

– diluted 

Basic earnings per share  

Diluted earnings per share 

Underlying basic earnings per share 

Underlying diluted earnings per share   

   80,645,280   80,645,280   80,645,280   82,734,574  82,734,574  82,734,574

(8.79)p 

(8.79)p 

3.62p 

3.57p 

(1.28)p 

(10.07)p 

(1.28)p 

(10.07)p 

0.00p 

0.00p 

3.62p 

3.57p 

(6.35)p 

(6.35)p 

3.70p  

3.51p 

(1.05)p 

(1.05)p 

0.84p 

0.80p 

(7.40)p

(7.40)p

4.54p

4.31p

1.  Highlighted items attributable to equity holders of the parent (see note 3), stated net of their total tax impact.

83

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

10. Goodwill

Cost 

At 1 January 2018 

Additions1 

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset2 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2018 

Disposals3 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2019 

Accumulated impairment 

At 1 January 2018 

Impairment4 

At 31 December 2018 

Impairment5 

Disposals3 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2018 

£’000

62,446

140

(22,299)

223

40,510

(3,129)

(632)

36,749

(3,129)

(2,607)

(5,736)

(5,989)

3,129

256

(8,340)

28,409

34,774

1.  £140,000 of goodwill was recognised following the revaluation of contingent consideration payable for the acquisition of Digital Balance 

Australia Pty Limited.

2.  Goodwill in relation to the Intel segment of £22,299,000 was reclassified to assets held for sale in the prior year statement of financial position. 

Refer to note 16 for more details.

3.  The disposal in the year relates to the write off of the goodwill cost and accumulated amortisation in relation to the Reputation division which 

was sold in the prior year.

4.  An impairment of £2,607,000 was recognised in relation to goodwill held in China Media (Shanghai) Management Consulting Company Limited 

so that the carrying value was adjusted to be in line with the value-in-use.

5.  An impairment of £5,082,000 was recognised in relation to goodwill held in Stratigent LLC so that the carrying value was adjusted down to £nil 
on the decision being taken to wind down this division. A further impairment of £907,000 was recognised for goodwill held in Digital Balance 
which equates to the downward revision of the contingent consideration payable. 

Goodwill has been allocated to the following segments:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

25,905 

2,504 

28,409 

26,294

8,480

34,774

Media  

Analytics & Tech 

84

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Group tests goodwill annually for impairment or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill may be potentially 
impaired. Goodwill is allocated to the Group’s cash-generating units (‘CGUs’) in order to carry out impairment tests. The Group’s 
remaining carrying value of goodwill by CGU at 31 December was as follows: 

Cash-generating unit 

Media UK and International 

Analytics USA 

China 

Media Germany 

Media Value Group 

FirmDecisions 

Media Australia 

Effectiveness 

Digital Balance 

Media America 

Media France 

Media Italy  

Russia 

Reporting segment 

Media  

Analytics & Tech 

Media  

Media  

Media/Analytics & Tech 

Media  

Media  

Analytics & Tech 

Analytics & Tech 

Media  

Media  

Media  

Media  

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

9,241 

— 

2,150 

4,319 

3,042 

2,981 

2,289 

1,678 

826 

604 

560 

382 

337 

9,263

5,057

2,242

4,327

3,197

2,981

2,369

1,678

1,745

604

572

402

337

28,409 

34,774

The impairment test involves comparing the carrying value of the CGU to which the goodwill has been allocated to the recoverable 
amount. The recoverable amount of all CGUs has been determined based on value-in-use calculations.

Under IFRS, an impairment charge is required for goodwill when the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount, defined as 
the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value-in-use. 

An impairment of £5,082,000 of goodwill was recognised in the year ended 31 December 2019 in relation to the Analytics USA 
CGU in order to write down the carrying value in full due to the winding down of the activities of this operation, and a further 
impairment of £907,000 was recognised to write down the carrying value of the goodwill in the Digital Balance CGU in line with 
the downward revision of the contingent consideration (year ended 31 December 2018: £2,607,000 determined with reference to 
the calculated value-in-use of the China CGU of £3,265,000 compared to the carrying value of goodwill of £5,872,000).

85

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

10. Goodwill continued
Value-in-use calculations
The key assumptions used in management’s value-in-use calculations are budgeted operating profit, pre-tax discount rate and the 
long-term growth rate. 

Budgeted operating profit assumptions
To calculate future expected cash flows, management has taken the Board-approved budgeted operating profit (‘EBIT’) for each 
of the CGUs for the 2020 financial year.

For the 2021 and 2022 financial years, the forecast EBIT is as per management and market expectations. The forecast 2022 
balances are taken to perpetuity in the model. The forecast for 2021 and 2022 uses certain assumptions to forecast revenue and 
operating costs within the Group’s operating segments beyond the 2020 budget.

Discount rate assumptions
The Directors estimate discount rates using rates that reflect current market assessments of the time value of money and risk 
specific to the CGUs. The three-year pre-tax cash flow forecasts have been discounted at between 7.0% and 12.0% (31 December 
2018: between 7.0% and 12.1%).

Growth rate assumptions
Cash flows beyond the three-year period are extrapolated at a rate of 2.25% (31 December 2018: 2.25%), which does not exceed 
the long-term average growth rate in any of the markets in which the Group operates.

The excess of the value-in-use to the goodwill carrying values for each CGU gives the level of headroom in each CGU. The 
estimated recoverable amounts of the Group’s operations in all CGUs significantly exceed their carrying values, with the exception 
of the China and Media America CGUs.

Sensitivity analysis
The Group’s calculations of value-in-use for its respective CGUs are sensitive to a number of key assumptions. Other than disclosed 
below, management does not consider a reasonable possible change, in isolation, of any of the key assumptions to cause the 
carrying value of any CGU to exceed its value-in-use. The considerations underpinning why management believes no impairment 
is required in respect of China and Media America are as follows, specifically what change in key assumptions would result in an 
impairment:

Budgeted revenue growth 

Budgeted cost growth 

Pre-tax discount rate 

China 

Media America

Current % 

8% 

5% 

12% 

% change leading 
to impairment1 

Current % 

% change leading 
to impairment1

(1)% to 7% 

17%-19% 

(8)% to 9%-11%

+1% to 6% 

0%-3% 

+2% to 14% 

11% 

+4% to 4%-7%

+28% to 39%

1.  These changes have been applied to 2021 and 2022 projected information.

86

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11. Other intangible assets

Cost 

At 31 January 2018 

Additions 

Reallocation 

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset2 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2018 

Additions 

Reallocation 

Disposals 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2019 

Amortisation and impairment 

At 31 January 2018 

Charge for the year – continuing operations3 

Charge for the year – discontinued operations3 

Impairment4 

Reallocation 

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset2 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2018 

Charge for the year3  

Impairment4 

Reallocation 

Disposals 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 December 20195 

At 31 December 2018 

  Capitalised 
  development 
costs 
£’000 

Computer 
software 
£’000 

Purchased 
intangible 
assets1 
£’000 

Total 
intangible 
assets
£’000

5,530 

1,084 

29 

(3,361) 

(24) 

3,258 

1,203 

10 

(388) 

(49) 

3,472 

25,333 

34,335

57 

17 

— 

— 

1,141

46

(894) 

(7,543) 

(11,798)

23 

2,675 

13 

— 

(139) 

(24) 

91 

90

17,881 

23,814

— 

— 

1,216

10

(1,402) 

(1,929)

(314) 

(387)

4,034 

2,525 

16,165 

22,724

(1,949) 

(1,896) 

(17,367) 

(21,212)

(326) 

(590) 

(125) 

— 

1,726 

6 

(428) 

(85) 

— 

(46) 

894 

(45) 

(1,240) 

(617) 

— 

— 

6,801 

(50) 

(1,994)

(1,292)

(125)

(46)

9,421

(89)

(1,258) 

(1,606) 

(12,473) 

(15,337)

(464) 

(155) 

(10) 

388 

28 

(409) 

(1,169) 

(2,042)

— 

— 

134 

28 

(607) 

— 

1,402 

210 

(762)

(10)

1,924

266

(1,471) 

(1,853) 

(12,637) 

(15,961)

2,563 

2,000 

672 

1,069 

3,528 

5,408 

6,763

8,477

1.  Purchased intangible assets consist principally of customer relationships with a typical useful life of eight to 10 years.

2.  Intangibles in relation to the Intel segment of £2,377,000 were reclassified to assets held for sale in the prior year statement of financial position. 

Refer to note 16 for more details.

3.  Amortisation is charged within administrative expenses so as to write off the cost of the intangible assets over their estimated useful lives. 

The amortisation of purchased intangible assets is included as a highlighted administrative expense.

4.  An impairment charge of £762,000 has been recognised for the year ended 31 December 2019 (year ended 31 December 2018: £125,000) 

following management’s review of the carrying value of other intangible assets.

5.  Of the net book value of capitalised development costs, £1,557,000 remains in development at 31 December 2019.

87

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

12. Property, plant and equipment

Cost 

At 31 December 2017 

Additions 

Allocation   

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset1 

Disposals 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2018 

Allocation   

Additions 

Disposals 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2019 

Accumulated depreciation 

At 31 December 2017 

Charge for the year – continuing operations 

Charge for the year – discontinued operations 

Allocation   

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset1 

Disposals 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2018 

Allocation   

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Foreign exchange differences 

At 31 December 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2018 

Motor 
vehicles 
£’000 

Fixtures, 
fittings and 
equipment 
£’000 

 Leasehold land 
Computer 
and building 
equipment  improvements 
£’000 

£’000 

Total
£’000

46 

— 

— 

— 

(27) 

1 

20 

— 

17 

— 

(1) 

36 

(21) 

(2) 

— 

— 

— 

14 

(1) 

(10) 

— 

(5) 

— 

— 

1,854 

5,308 

1,599 

8,807

54 

14 

264 

(184) 

324 

354 

642

185

(249) 

(2,182) 

(384) 

(2,815)

(66) 

15 

1,622 

— 

230 

(796) 

(40) 

1,016 

(917) 

(137) 

(10) 

(329) 

200 

18 

(12) 

(39) 

10 

3,177 

16 

561 

— 

6 

1,899 

(45) 

1,417 

(132)

31

6,718

(29)

2,225

(1,834) 

(1,188) 

(3,818)

(86) 

1,834 

(36) 

2,047 

(163)

4,933

(4,607) 

(1,433) 

(6,978)

(330) 

(80) 

219 

1,900 

5 

(17) 

(196) 

(39) 

(75) 

304 

— 

(2) 

(665)

(129)

(185)

2,404

37

(32)

(1,187) 

(2,910) 

(1,441) 

(5,548)

(30) 

(125) 

755 

23 

14 

(210) 

1,845 

57 

45 

(227) 

1,017 

19 

29

(567)

3,617

99

(15) 

(564) 

(1,204) 

(587) 

(2,370)

21 

10 

453 

435 

630 

267 

1,460 

458 

2,563

1,170

1.  Property, plant and equipment in relation to the Intel segment of £411,000 was reclassified to assets held for sale in the prior year statement of 

financial position. Refer to note 16 for more details.

88

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13. Right-of-use assets and lease liabilities
Right-of-use assets:

Cost 

At 31 December 2018 

Assets recognised on adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019 

Additions  

At 31 December 2019 

Accumulated depreciation 

At 31 December 2018 

Charge for the year  

Impairment for the year   

At 31 December 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2018 

Lease liabilities: 

Cost 

At 31 December 2018 

Liabilities recognised on adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019 

Additions 

Cash payments in the year 

Interest charge in the year 

At 31 December 2019 

Current 

Non-current 

The present value of the minimum lease payments are as follows: 

Amounts due: 

Within one year 

Between one and two years 

Between two and three years 

Between three and four years 

Between four and five years 

Later than five years 

Buildings 
£’000 

Equipment 
£’000 

Vehicles 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

— 

5,208 

5,109 

10,317 

— 

(1,568) 

(641) 

(2,209) 

8,108 

— 

— 

178 

22 

200 

— 

(15) 

— 

(15) 

185 

— 

— 

41 

18 

59 

— 

(13) 

— 

(13) 

46 

— 

—

5,427

5,149

10,576

—

(1,596)

(641)

(2,237)

8,339

—

Buildings 
£’000 

Equipment 
£’000 

Vehicles 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

— 

5,533 

4,739 

(1,139) 

247 

9,380 

1,771 

7,609 

— 

178 

22 

(36) 

5 

169 

46 

123 

— 

41 

18 

—

5,752

4,779

(19) 

(1,194)

1 

41 

17 

24 

253

9,590

1,834

7,756

Minimum lease payments

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

 2,116  

2,307  

2,115  

1,896  

893  

1,083 

10,410 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

89

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

14. Subsidiaries
Details of the Company’s subsidiaries are set out below.

Subsidiary undertaking 

Adtrack Limited 

AMMO Limited  

Axiology Limited  

Barsby Rowe Limited 

BCMG Acquisitions Limited  

BCMG Limited  

Billetts Consulting Limited  

Billetts International Limited  

Billetts Limited  

Billetts Marketing Investment Management Limited 

Billetts Marketing Sciences Limited 

Billetts Media Consulting Limited 

Brief Information Limited  

Checking Advertising Services Limited  

Proportion of 
nominal value of 
issued ordinary 
shares held 

Country of  
incorporation 

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100% 

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%  

UK 

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

Nature 
of business

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading

Holding company 

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading

China Media (Shanghai) Management Consulting Company Limited2 

100%3  

 China  

Media consultancy

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%3  

100%  

100%3 

100%  

100%3 

100%3 

51%3 

100%3 

100%3  

100%3  

50.1%3 

50.1%3 

100%3 

100% 

100%3  

100%3  

100%  

100%3  

100%3 

100%3 

Hong Kong  

Holding company 

UK  

Non-trading 

Australia  Multi-channel analytics

UK  

UK  

UK  

Non-trading 

Holding company

Media consultancy 

Germany  

Media consultancy 

US 

Holding company 

Spain  

Media consultancy 

US  

Italy  

Media consultancy 

Media consultancy 

Ireland 

Media consultancy

Singapore  

Media consultancy 

Australia 

Media consultancy

UK  

Media consultancy 

Russia  

France  

Media consultancy

Media consultancy 

UK  

UK  

US  

UK  

UK  

UK  

Australia  

Non-trading 

Holding company 

Holding company 

Holding company 

Non-trading 

Non-trading

Non-trading

China Media Consulting Group Limited  

Data Management Services Group Limited  

Digital Balance Australia Pty Limited2 

Digireels Limited  

Ebiquity Asia Pacific Limited  

Ebiquity Associates Limited2 

Ebiquity Germany GmbH2, 4 

Ebiquity Holdings Inc. 

Ebiquity Iberia S.L2 

Ebiquity Inc.2 

Ebiquity Italy Media Advisor S.r.l.2 

Ebiquity Marsh Limited2 

Ebiquity Pte. Limited2 

Ebiquity Pty Limited2 

Ebiquity Russia Limited2 

Ebiquity Russia OOO2 

Ebiquity SAS2 

Ebiquity US Financing Limited  

Ebiquity US Holdings Limited  

Ebiquity US Holdings LLC  

Ebiquity UK Holdings Limited  

Ebiquity UK Limited 

Fairbrother Lenz Eley Limited  

Faulkner Group Pty Limited  

90

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Subsidiary undertaking 

FirmDecisions ASJP Germany GmbH2 

FirmDecisions China Limited2 

FirmDecisions DMCC1,2 

FirmDecisions Group Limited  

FirmDecisions ASJP LLC2 

FirmDecisions Pty Limited2 

FirmDecisions Iberia S.L.2 

FirmDecisions Limited2 

FLE Holdings Limited  

Fouberts Place Subsidiary No. 4 Limited  

Freshcorp Limited 

Mediaadvantage Consulting L.d.a2  

Nova Vision Europe S.A. 

Prominent Pages Limited  

Shots Limited  

Stratigent LLC2  

Telefoto Monitoring Services Limited  

The Billett Consultancy Limited 

The Communication Trading Company Limited  

The Press Advertising Register Limited  

The Register Group Limited  

Worldwide Media Management Limited  

Xtreme Information Limited  

Xtreme Information Services (Australia) Pty Limited  

Xtreme Information Services Limited  

Xtreme Information Services SPRL 

Xtreme Information (USA) Limited 

1.  FirmDecisions DMCC was incorporated in March 2019.

2.  Principal trading entity.

3.  Shares held by an intermediate holding company.

Proportion of 
nominal value of 
issued ordinary 
shares held 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100% 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100% 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100%3 

100% 

100%3 

100%3 

Country of  
incorporation 

Nature 
of business

Germany 

Media consultancy

China 

UAE 

UK  

US  

Media consultancy

Media consultancy

Holding company 

Media consultancy 

Australia  

Media consultancy 

Spain 

Media consultancy

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

Media consultancy 

Holding company 

Non-trading

Non-trading 

Portugal  

Media consultancy

Belgium  

UK  

UK  

Non-trading 

Non-trading

Non-trading 

US   Multi-channel analytics 

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

UK  

Australia 

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

Non-trading

UK 

Holding company

Belgium 

UK  

Non-trading 

Non-trading 

4.  In June 2019, the Group acquired the outstanding 5.97% interest in Ebiquity Germany GmbH from the minority shareholder.

15. Trade and other receivables

Trade and other receivables due within one year  

Net trade receivables (note 27) 

Other receivables  

Prepayments  

Contract assets 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

16,078 

18,320

882 

1,260 

9,366 

27,586 

2,325

760

8,003

29,408

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts of trade and other receivables are reasonable approximations of their fair value.

91

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

16. Assets and liabilities held for sale
In 2017, the Board concluded that the most probable route to realising future economic benefit through its AdIntel business was 
through a sale rather than continuing to operate it as part of the larger Group. Accordingly, it commenced a sale process to see if 
this business could be sold at an acceptable price.

On 12 February 2018, the Group agreed to dispose of the AdIntel business to Nielsen for gross consideration of £26,000,000. 
This transaction was subject to certain conditions, including approval from the Competition and Markets Authority who 
immediately commenced a Phase I examination. This led to a Phase II examination that was not concluded until November 2018. 
This disposal to Nielsen was completed on 2 January 2019. The gross consideration was dependent upon a working capital target 
position at the date of completion. The working capital acquired by Nielsen was below this target and a resulting repayment was 
made to Nielsen of £1,155,000 on 31 October 2019; net consideration was therefore £24,845,000.

Under the terms of the disposal, the Group will provide certain services to Nielsen to facilitate the acquisition and integration of 
the AdIntel business. These services include the provision of office space, financial administration and IT support for a period of up 
to 18 months post completion.

In accordance with IFRS 5, the AdIntel business was treated as an asset held for sale as at 31 December 2018 since, at this date, 
the sale was deemed to be probable, and the disposal of AdIntel will signal a complete exit from this service line. 

The net assets of the AdIntel business, which have been presented net on the Group balance sheet, are shown below:

  31 December  
2019 
£’000 

2 January  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

22,295 

2,377 

414 

40 

22,293

2,377

412

40

25,126 

25,122

2,854 

— 

2,854 

27,980 

(1,058) 

(3,283) 

(86) 

2,612

—

2,612

27,734

(796)

(2,940)

(86)

(4,427) 

(3,822)

(413) 

(80) 

(493) 

(413)

(81)

(494)

(4,920) 

(4,316)

23,060 

23,418

Non‑current assets 

Goodwill 

Other intangible assets   

Property, plant and equipment 

Deferred tax asset 

Total non‑current assets  

Current assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables 

Accruals and contract liabilities 

Current tax liabilities 

Total current liabilities 

Non‑current liabilities 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Provisions   

Total non‑current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total net assets 

92

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents earn interest at between 0% and 0.5%.

Cash and cash equivalents include the following for the purposes of the cash flow statement:

Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank overdrafts (note 20) 

Cash, cash equivalents and bank overdrafts 

18. Trade and other payables

Trade payables 

Other taxation and social security 

Other payables 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

 2019 
£’000 

8,236 

8,793

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
 £’000 

8,236 

— 

8,236 

8,793

(2,379)

6,414

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

2,615 

2,116 

844 

5,575 

3,385

2,837

1,288

7,510

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts of trade and other payables are reasonable approximations of their fair value.

19. Accruals and contract liabilities

Accruals 

Contract liabilities 

20. Financial liabilities

Current  

Bank overdraft  

Loan fees1   

Contingent consideration 

Non‑current  

Bank borrowings  

Loan fees1   

Contingent consideration  

Total financial liabilities   

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

4,449 

4,635 

9,084 

6,661

3,979

10,640

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

— 

(36) 

14 

(22) 

2,379

(65)

508

2,822

14,000 

34,000

(132) 

— 

13,868 

13,846 

(35)

969

34,934

37,756

1.  Loan fees were payable on amending the banking facility and are being recognised in the income statement on a straight-line basis to the 

maturity date of the facility, this being August 2024.

93

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

20. Financial liabilities continued

At 1 January 2018  

Recognised on acquisition 

Paid  

Charged to the income statement  

Discounting charged to the income statement  

Borrowings  

Repayments  

Foreign exchange released to the income statement  

At 31 December 2018 

Recognised on revaluation 

Paid  

Charged to the income statement  

Discounting charged to the income statement  

Repayments  

Foreign exchange released to the income statement  

At 31 December 2019 

A currency analysis for the bank borrowings is shown below:

Pounds sterling 

Total bank borrowings 

Bank  
overdrafts 
£’000 

Bank  Finance lease  Contingent 
liabilities  consideration 
£’000 

£’000 

borrowings 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

407 

33,161 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1,972 

— 

— 

— 

(70) 

59 

— 

2,000 

(1,250) 

— 

2,379 

33,900 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(180) 

112 

— 

(2,379) 

(20,000) 

— 

— 

— 

13,832 

4 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(4) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2,094 

35,666

148 

(858) 

238 

(78) 

— 

— 

(67) 

1,477 

336 

(983) 

(989) 

218 

— 

(45) 

14 

148

(928)

297

(78)

3,972

(1,254)

(67)

37,756

336

(1,163)

(877)

218

(22,379)

(45)

13,846

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

13,832 

13,832 

33,900

33,900

On 20 September 2019, the Group refinanced its banking facilities with Barclays and Royal Bank of Scotland and on 
20 September 2019 drew down on these new facilities. The new committed facility, totalling £24,000,000, comprises a revolving 
credit facility (‘RCF’) of £23,000,000 (of which £14,000,000 was drawn on refinance) and £1,000,000 available as an overdraft 
for working capital purposes. The RCF has a maturity date of 20 September 2023. The drawn RCF and any further drawings 
under the RCF are repayable on maturity of the facility. The facility may be used for deferred consideration payments on past 
acquisitions, to fund future potential acquisitions, and for general working capital requirements.

Loan arrangement fees of £168,000 (31 December 2018: £100,000) are offset against the term loan, and are being amortised 
over the period of the loan. £36,000 of loan arrangement fees have been included within creditors due within one year and the 
balancing £132,000 has been included within creditors due after more than one year.

The facility bears variable interest of LIBOR plus a margin of 2.25%. The margin rate is able to be lowered each quarter end 
depending on the Group’s net debt to EBITDA ratio.

The undrawn amount of the revolving credit facility is liable to a fee of 40% of the prevailing margin. The Group may elect to 
prepay all or part of the outstanding loan subject to a break fee, by giving five business days’ notice.

All amounts owing to the bank are guaranteed by way of fixed and floating charges over the current and future assets of the 
Group. As such, a composite guarantee has been given by all significant subsidiary companies in the UK, US, Germany and 
Australia.

Contingent consideration represents additional amounts that are expected to be payable for acquisitions made by the Group 
and is held at fair value at the statement of financial position date. All amounts are expected to be fully paid by June 2020.

94

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21. Provisions

At 1 January 2018 

Recognition of onerous lease provision  

Reclassification of available-for-sale liability 

At 31 December 2018  

Recognition of dilapidations provision   

Discounting charged to the income statement 

Utilisation of provision 

Unused amounts released to income statement 

At 31 December 2019 

Current  

Non-current  

Onerous  

lease1  Dilapidations2 
£’000  

£’000  

Total 
£’000 

— 

324 

— 

324 

— 

— 

(57) 

(267) 

— 

— 

— 

393 

— 

(80) 

313 

450 

(63) 

— 

(13) 

687 

300 

387 

393

324

(80)

637

450

(63)

(57)

(280)

687

300

387

1.  The onerous lease provisions recognised in the prior year in relation to the Hamburg and Sydney offices have been utilised in the current year, with 
the excess released. The provisions were utilised until the Company was released from the lease obligation on a new tenant occupying the space. 

2.  The dilapidations provision relates to the expected costs of vacating various properties. The amount recognised in the year relates to the newly 

occupied London office. The provision is expected to be fully utilised by June 2024.

22. Deferred tax

At 1 January 2018 

(Charge)/credit to income 

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset 

At 31 December 2018  

Credit/(charge) to income  

At 31 December 2019  

Tangible 
assets 
£’000  

Intangible  Share-based 
payments 
£’000  

assets 
£’000  

Tax  Other timing 
differences 
£’000  

losses 
£’000  

267 

(25) 

— 

242 

162 

404 

(1,898) 

213 

404 

(1,281) 

245 

(1,036) 

999 

(542) 

(29) 

428 

(327) 

101 

220 

56 

— 

276 

171 

447 

(393) 

106 

(3) 

(290) 

52 

(238) 

Total 
£’000 

(805)

(192)

372

(625)

303

(322)

Certain non-current deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balance 
(after offset) for financial reporting purposes:

Deferred tax assets – non-current 

Deferred tax liabilities – current 

Deferred tax liabilities – non-current 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

986 

(272) 

(1,036) 

(322) 

979

(323)

(1,281)

(625)

At the year end, the Group had tax losses of £2,062,000 (31 December 2018: £1,190,000) available for offset against future 
profits. A deferred tax asset of £447,000 (31 December 2018: £276,000) has been recognised in respect of such losses.

The Group has unrecognised tax losses of £784,000 (31 December 2018: £3,103,000) and unrecognised deferred tax assets of 
£156,000 (31 December 2018: £590,000) in relation to tax losses.

Deferred tax on unremitted earnings has not been recognised as management do not intend to pay dividends from jurisdictions 
where a tax charge would be incurred and dividends received are not taxed in the UK.

95

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

23. Operating leases 
Lessee
The Group leases various offices under non-cancellable operating leases, with the majority of these expiring within one to 
five years. The leases have varying terms, break clauses and renewal rights.

From 1 January 2019, the Group has recognised right-of-use assets for these leases, except for short-term and low-value leases; 
see notes 13 and 27 for further information.

The Group has future aggregate minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases which fall due as follows:

No later than one year  

Later than one year but no later than five years  

Later than five years  

31 December 2019 

31 December 2018

Land and 
buildings 
£’000 

Other 
£’000 

Land and 
buildings 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2,245 

4,613 

1,285 

8,143 

Other 
£’000

150

58

—

208

Lessor
There is no minimum aggregate future rent receivable under non-cancellable operating leases as at 31 December 2018.

24. Ordinary shares

At 31 December 2017 – ordinary shares of 25p  

Share options exercised   

At 31 December 2018 – ordinary shares of 25p 

Share options exercised   

At 31 December 2019 – ordinary shares of 25p  

Number  
of shares 

Nominal 
value 
£’000

78,197,461 

19,549

915,729 

229

79,113,190 

19,778

1,002,436 

251

  80,115,626 

20,029

Ordinary shares carry voting rights and are entitled to share in the profits of the Company (dividends). At the year end, 2,410,458 
shares were held by the ESOP (31 December 2018: 3,291,569). The Company does not have a limited amount of authorised capital.

25. Reserves
Share premium 
The share premium reserve of £46,000 (31 December 2018: £44,000) shows the amount subscribed for share capital in excess of 
the nominal value. 

Other reserves
Other reserves consists of the merger reserve, ESOP reserve and translation reserve.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve of £3,667,000 (31 December 2018: £3,667,000) arose on the issuance of shares at a premium on a Group 
restructure, where the premium on issue qualified for merger relief. There has been no movement in the period.

ESOP reserve
The ESOP reserve of £1,478,000 debit (31 December 2018: £1,478,000 debit) represents the cost of own shares acquired in the 
Company by the Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’). The purpose of the EBT is to facilitate and encourage the ownership of shares by 
employees, by acquiring shares in the Company and distributing them in accordance with employee share schemes. The EBT may 
operate in conjunction with the Company’s existing share option schemes and other schemes that may apply from time to time.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve of £2,239,000 (31 December 2018: £2,955,000) arises on the translation into sterling of the net assets of 
the Group’s foreign operations, offset by any changes in fair value of financial instruments used to hedge this exposure. At this 
time there are no hedges in place.

Retained earnings
The retained earnings reserve shows the cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the consolidated income statement. 

For detailed movements on each of the above reserves, refer to the consolidated statement of changes in equity.

96

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26. Share-based payments
The Group operates a number of equity-settled share incentive schemes used to award employees of the Group. A charge 
based on the fair value of the award on the grant date is taken to the consolidated income statement over the vesting period 
to recognise the cost of these. 

Options outstanding at 31 December 2019:

Name of share option scheme 
and grant date 

Executive Incentive Plan 
– 12 May 2010 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 26 May 2010 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 30 July 2010 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 11 August 2011 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 27 September 2012 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 23 May 2013 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 17 January 2014 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 15 May 2014 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 1 October 2015 

Executive Incentive Plan 
– 27 January 2016 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 24 July 2017 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 13 February 2018 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 24 May 2018 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 11 July 2018 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 11 November 2019 

Executive Share Option Plan 
– 4 December 2019 

Life of 
option 

10 years 

10 years 

10 years 

Exercise 
period 

Exercise 
price 
(pence) 

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 
(pence) 

Number

May 2010-May 2020 

35.0 

35.0  4,200,000

May 2011-May 2020 

64.5 

64.5 

62,015

July 2011-July 2020 

61.0 

61.0 

34,482

10 years 

August 2012-August 2021 

25.0-71.5 

47.2 

83,785

10 years 

September 2013-September 2022 

97.5 

97.5 

135,000

10 years 

April 2016-May 2023 

25.0 

25.0 

95,239

10 years 

April 2016-January 2024 

25.0 

25.0 

109,891

10 years 

April 2017-May 2024 

25.0 

25.0 

126,551

10 years 

April 2018-October 2025 

25.0 

25.0 

590,000

10 years 

June 2016-January 2026 

25.0 

25.0 

200,000

10 years 

December 2018-July 2027 

nil 

nil 

340,000

10 years 

April 2021-February 2028 

25.0 

25.0 

1,880,000

10 years 

December 2020-May 2028 

nil-25.0 

16.9 

905,000

10 years 

April 2023-July 2028 

25.0 

25.0 

315,000

10 years 

December 2021-November 2029 

10 years 

April 2022-December 2029 

nil 

nil 

nil 

340,000

nil 

1,472,500

  10,889,463

Executive Incentive Plan (‘EIP’)
This is a discretionary scheme for the Directors of the Company. 

On 12 May 2010, 4,200,000 options with an exercise price of 35p each were awarded under the EIP to two Directors. Vesting of 
the options was subject to the satisfaction of performance criteria designed to achieve growth of the business while at the same 
time maintaining and enhancing underlying earnings per share over the period to 30 April 2013.

Executive Share Option Plan (‘ESOP’)
This is a discretionary scheme, comprised of an HMRC-approved schedule and an unapproved schedule. The ESOP provides a 
lock-in incentive to Executive Directors and key management. Vesting of these options is subject to the satisfaction of certain 
performance criteria and typically around the rate of growth of diluted adjusted earnings per share over a three-year period. 
Rights to ESOP options lapse if the employee leaves the Company.

1,812,500 (31 December 2018: 4,495,000) share options have been granted to employees under the ESOP in the year ended 
31 December 2019.

97

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

26. Share-based payments continued
Executive Share Option Plan (‘ESOP’) continued
Options had not been granted to the executive team between October 2015 and February 2018 due to many of them being 
involved in the sale of the AdIntel business and therefore possessing price-sensitive information. In 2018, options were 
granted in respect of the years ending 31 December 2016, 2017 and 2018. The options awarded in respect of the years ended 
31 December 2016 and 31 December 2017 vest based on a sliding scale of compound growth of adjusted diluted EPS over a 
five-year period of between 4% and 10%. 

The options awarded in respect of the years ending 31 December 2018 and 31 December 2019 have the same performance 
conditions other than the EPS growth rates of between 8% and 15% are required for vesting. 

Enterprise Management Incentive scheme (‘EMI scheme’)
The EMI scheme is a discretionary share option scheme which provides that options with a value at the date of grant of up to 
£120,000 may be granted to employees. The EMI scheme provides a lock-in incentive to key management and is also utilised 
to attract key staff. Rights to EMI share options lapse if the employee leaves the Company. There are no further performance 
conditions.

No share options have been granted under this scheme since 13 April 2010 as the Group was, from that date, too large to qualify 
under the HMRC EMI scheme rules. As at 31 December 2019, there are no options outstanding under this scheme.

Unapproved Company Share Option Plan (‘UCSOP’)
This is a discretionary scheme, which provides that options may be granted where employees were not eligible to join the EMI 
scheme. The UCSOP provides a lock-in incentive to key management. Rights to UCSOP options lapse if the employee leaves 
the Company.

No share options have been granted to any employees under the UCSOP in the year ended 31 December 2019.

Movements in outstanding ordinary share options:

Outstanding at beginning of year  

Granted during the year   

Exercised during the year 

Lapsed during the year 

Performance criteria not expected to be met 

Outstanding at the end of the year  

Exercisable at the end of the year 

31 December 2019 

31 December 2018

Weighted 
Number 
average 
of share   exercise price 
(pence) 
options 

  Weighted 
Number 
average 
of share   exercise price 
(pence)
options 

11,333,071 

1,812,500 

 28.6   8,443,801 

 —   4,495,000 

(1,002,437) 

 0.3  

(915,730) 

(1,253,671) 

— 

 —  

 —  

(389,999) 

(300,000) 

  10,889,463 

 28.8  

11,333,071 

5,976,963 

 0.3  

6,854,741 

30.9

23.0

27.5

19.9

25.0

28.6

33.2

During the year, share options were granted with a weighted average fair value of 41.1p (31 December 2018: 64.0p). These fair 
values were calculated using the Black-Scholes model with the following inputs:

Weighted average share price  

Exercise price 

Expected volatility1 

Vesting period  

Risk-free interest rates 

  31 December 
2019 

  31 December  
2018

41.1p 

nil 

38.80% 

64.0p

nil-25.0p

15.1%

 2 to 2.5 years 

0.57% to 0.61% 

 2.5 to 5 years

1.93% to 2.12%

1.  Expected volatility is based on historical volatility of the Company over the period commensurate with the expected life of the options.

Options exercised in the period resulted in 1,002,437 shares (31 December 2018: 915,730 shares) being issued at a weighted 
average price of 25p each (31 December 2018: 27.5p). The weighted average share price on the dates of exercise for options 
exercised during the year was 51.0p (31 December 2018: 68.0p).

The options outstanding at the end of the year have a weighted average remaining contractual life of 2.2 years 
(31 December 2018: 5.4 years), with a range of exercise prices being between nil and 25p.

The total charge in respect of share option schemes recognised in the consolidated income statement during the period amounted 
to £195,000 (31 December 2018: £394,000).

98

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
27. Capital and financial risk management
General objectives, policies and processes
The overall objective of the Board is to set policies that seek to reduce risk as far as possible without unduly affecting the Group’s 
competitiveness and flexibility. The Board has overall responsibility for the determination of the Group’s risk management policies 
and, whilst retaining ultimate responsibility for them, it has delegated the authority for designing and operating the processes 
that ensure the effective implementation of the financial risk management objectives and policies, to the Group’s finance 
function. The Board receives monthly reports from the Group’s finance function through which it monitors the effectiveness of the 
processes put in place and the appropriateness of the policies it sets. Further details regarding these policies are set out on pages 
99 to 103.

Capital and other reserves 
The Group considers its capital to comprise of its cash and cash equivalents, borrowings, ordinary share capital, share premium, 
non-controlling interests, reserves and accumulated retained earnings.

The Group’s objective when maintaining capital is to safeguard the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern so that it can 
continue to invest in the growth of the business and ultimately to provide an adequate return to its shareholders. The Directors 
believe the Group has sufficient capital to continue trading in the foreseeable future. 

The following table summarises the capital of the Group:

Financial assets: 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Financial liabilities held at amortised cost: 

Bank overdraft 

Bank borrowings 

Net debt 

Equity 

Capital 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

8,236 

8,793

— 

(2,379)

(13,832) 

(33,900)

(5,596) 

(27,486)

(38,640) 

(47,514)

(44,236) 

(75,000)

Financial risk management
The Group is exposed to risks that arise from its use of financial instruments. The Group’s objectives, policies and processes for 
managing those risks and the methods used to measure them are described below. Further quantitative information in respect of 
these risks is presented throughout these financial statements.

There have been no substantive changes in the Group’s exposure to financial instrument risks, its objectives, policies and processes 
for managing those risks or the methods used to measure them from previous periods unless otherwise stated in this note.

The Group is exposed through its operations to a variety of financial risks: credit risk; market risk (including interest rate and 
currency risk); and liquidity risk.

Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or a counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its 
contractual obligations.

Trade receivables
The Group operates in an industry where most of its customers are reputable and well-established multinational or large national 
businesses. When the creditworthiness of a new customer is in doubt, credit limits and payment terms are established and 
authorised by the Territory Finance Director. The Group will suspend the services provided to customers who fail to meet the terms 
and conditions specified in their contract where it is deemed necessary.

There is no concentration of credit risk within the Group. The maximum credit risk exposure relating to financial assets is 
represented by the carrying values as at the year end.

The credit control function of the Group monitors outstanding debts of the Group. Debtor reports are reviewed and analysed 
on a regular basis. Trade receivables are analysed by the ageing and value of the debts. Customers with any overdue debts are 
contacted for payment and progress is tracked on a credit control report. Based on these procedures, management assessed the 
credit quality of those receivables that are neither past due nor impaired as low risk. There have been no significant changes to the 
composition of receivables counterparties within the Group that indicate this would change in the future.

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts of trade and other receivables are reasonable approximations of their fair value.

99

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

27. Capital and financial risk management continued
Credit risk continued
Financial assets past due but not impaired
The following is an analysis of the Group’s trade receivables identifying the totals of trade receivables which are past due 
but not impaired:

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2018 

The following is an analysis of the Group’s provision against trade receivables:

Total 
£’000 

3,848 

9,081 

Past due  
+ 30 days  
£’000 

Past due  
+ 60 days 
£’000

1,827 

5,328 

2,021

3,753

Trade receivables 

31 December 2019 

31 December 2018

Gross 
value  
£’000 

16,153 

Provision 
£’000 

Carrying 
value 
£’000 

Gross  
value  
£’000 

Provision 
£’000 

Carrying 
value 
£’000

(75) 

16,078 

18,393 

(73) 

18,320

The Group records impairment losses on its trade receivables separately from the gross amounts receivable. Impaired receivables 
are provided against based on expected recoverability. The movements on this allowance during the year are summarised below:

Opening balance 

Increase in provision 

Written off against provision 

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset 

Recovered amount reversed 

Closing balance 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

73 

83 

(41) 

— 

(40) 

75 

262

46

(95)

(39)

(101)

73

Market risk
Market risk arises from the Group’s use of interest-bearing, tradable and foreign currency financial instruments. There is a risk that 
the fair value of future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in interest rates (interest rate risk), 
foreign exchange rates (currency risk) or other market factors (other price risk).

Interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk from bank loans and a revolving credit facility.

To illustrate the Group’s exposure to interest rate risk, a 0.5% increase/decrease in the rate applied to the Group’s borrowings 
would have resulted in a post-tax movement of £67,000 (31 December 2018: £139,000).

Currency risk
The Group is exposed to currency risk on foreign currency trading and intercompany balances, and also on the foreign currency 
bank accounts which it holds. These risks are offset by the holding of certain foreign currency bank borrowings. The translation of 
the assets and liabilities of the Group’s overseas subsidiaries represents a risk to the Group’s equity balances.

The Group’s exposure to currency risk at the year end can be illustrated by the following:

31 December 2019 

31 December 2018

Increase  
in profit 
before tax1 
£’000 

99 

339 

10 

Increase in  
equity1 
£’000 

2,447 

1,143 

653 

Increase  
 in profit 
before tax1 
£’000 

179 

314 

162 

Increase in 
equity1
£’000

3,350

1,445

603

10% strengthening of US dollar 

10% strengthening of euro 

10% strengthening of Australian dollar 

1.  An equal weakening of any currency would broadly have the opposite effect.

100

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The currency profile of the financial assets at 31 December 2019 is as follows:

Cash and cash  
equivalents 

Gross trade 
receivables

  31 December  31 December  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2018 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

2019 
£’000 

Pounds sterling 

US dollar 

Euro 

Australian dollar 

Russian rouble 

Singapore dollar 

Chinese renminbi 

Indian rupee 

New Zealand dollar 

South African rand 

United Arab Emirate dirham 

1,731 

1,588 

3,227 

555 

243 

233 

555 

— 

— 

— 

104 

8,236 

2,659 

1,789 

2,576 

1,106 

176 

121 

366 

— 

— 

— 

— 

4,621 

3,360 

6,527 

683 

343 

(35) 

423 

20 

117 

19 

— 

5,458

5,056

6,162

835

292

3

414

72

71

30

—

8,793 

16,078 

18,393

Other price risks
The Group does not have any material exposure to other price risks.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s management of working capital and the finance charges and principal repayments on its 
debt instruments, the risk being that the Group may not meet its financial obligations as they fall due.

The liquidity risk of each Group company is managed centrally by the Group. All surplus cash in the UK is held centrally to maximise 
the returns on deposits through economies of scale. The type of cash instrument used and its maturity date will depend on the 
Group’s forecast cash requirements. Throughout the year, the Group maintained a revolving credit facility with Barclays and Royal 
Bank of Scotland (see note 20) to manage any short-term cash requirements. At 31 December 2019, £9,000,000 (31 December 
2018: £nil) of the revolving credit facility was undrawn and the £1,000,000 overdraft remains available. The facility expires in 
September 2023, at which point drawn-down amounts will be repayable.

It is a condition of the borrowings that the Group passes various covenant tests on a quarterly basis and the Group finance team 
regularly monitors the Group forecasts to ensure they are not breached.

Categories of financial assets and liabilities
The following tables set out the categories of financial instruments held by the Group. All of the Group’s financial assets and 
liabilities are measured at amortised cost.

Financial assets

Current financial assets   

Loans and receivables:  

Trade and other receivables1 (note 15)   

Cash and cash equivalents (note 17) 

Gross trade receivables   

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

16,960 

8,236 

25,196 

20,645

8,793

29,438

1.  Trade and other receivables includes net trade receivables and other receivables and excludes prepayments and contract assets.

101

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

27. Capital and financial risk management continued
Financial liabilities

Current financial liabilities

Other financial liabilities at amortised cost: 

Trade and other payables1 

Accruals 

Bank overdrafts 

Loans and borrowings 

Lease liabilities2 

Liabilities at fair value through profit and loss:

Contingent consideration 

Non‑current financial liabilities 

Other financial liabilities at amortised cost: 

Loans and borrowings 

Lease liabilities2 

Liabilities at fair value through profit and loss: 

Contingent consideration 

Total financial liabilities   

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

3,459 

4,449 

— 

(36) 

1,834 

14 

9,720 

13,868 

7,756 

— 

21,624 

31,344 

4,672

6,659

2,379

(65)

—

508

14,153

33,965

—

969

34,934

49,087

1.  Trade and other payables includes trade payables and other payables and excludes other taxation and social security and contract liabilities.

2.  Lease liabilities were recognised on 1 January 2019 on the adoption of IFRS 16.

The following table illustrates the contractual maturity analysis of the Group’s financial liabilities:

At 31 December 2019 

Trade and other payables 

Accruals 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Lease liabilities1 

Contingent consideration 

Total financial liabilities   

Less: finance charges allocated to future periods 

Present value 

At 31 December 2018 

Trade and other payables 

Accruals 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Contingent consideration 

Total financial liabilities   

Less: finance charges allocated to future periods 

Present value 

1.  Lease liabilities were recognised in the current year on adopting IFRS 16 from 1 January 2019.

Within 
one year 
£’000 

One to 
 five years 
£’000 

3,459 

4,449 

541 

2,111 

14 

— 

— 

15,762 

8,293 

— 

Total 
£’000

3,459

4,449

16,303

10,404

14

10,574 

24,055 

34,624

(854) 

(2,431) 

(3,285)

9,720 

21,624 

31,344

4,672 

6,659 

4,153 

508 

— 

— 

37,035 

969 

15,992 

38,004 

4,672

6,659

41,188

1,477

53,996

(1,839) 

(3,070) 

(4,909)

14,153 

34,934 

49,087

102

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fair value measurement
The following table provides an analysis of financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value, 
grouped into Levels 1 to 3 based on the degree to which the fair value is observable:

•  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;

•  Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are 

observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly; and

•  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that 

are not based on observable market data.

At 31 December 2019 

Financial liabilities 

Contingent consideration 

At 31 December 2018 

Financial liabilities 

Contingent consideration 

Level 1 
£’000 

Level 2 
£’000  

Level 3 
£’000  

Total 
£’000 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

14 

14 

14

14

1,477 

1,477 

1,477

1,477

Refer to note 20 for a reconciliation of movements during the year.

The fair value of the contingent consideration of £14,000 (31 December 2018: £1,477,000) was estimated by applying the income 
approach. The fair value estimates are based on a discount rate of 3.0% forecast EBIT of Ebiquity Marsh Limited. This is a Level 3 
fair value measurement. The key assumptions in calculating the contingent consideration payable are the EBIT of the businesses 
acquired and the discount rate.

28. Dividends

Dividend in respect of the prior year 

Total dividend paid 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

534 

534 

527

527

A dividend of £534,000 was paid during the current financial year (31 December 2018: £527,000). Dividends were paid to 
non-controlling interests as shown in the consolidated statement of changes in equity.

103

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

29. Cash generated from operations

(Loss) before taxation  

Adjustments for:  

Depreciation (notes 12 and 13)  

Amortisation (note 11) 

Loan fees written off 

Gain on disposal  

Impairment of right-of-use assets (note 13) 

Impairment of goodwill (note 10) 

Impairment of intangibles (note 11) 

Unrealised foreign exchange loss  

Share option charges (note 3)  

Finance income (note 6)   

Finance expenses (note 6)  

Contingent consideration revaluations (note 3) 

Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables   

(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables 

Movement in provisions   

Cash generated from operations – continuing operations 

Cash generated from operations – discontinued operations 

Cash generated from operations 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

(5,061) 

(2,504)

2,163 

2,042 

58 

5 

641 

665

1,994

—

—

—

5,989 

2,732

761 

47 

195 

(9) 

907 

(779) 

6,959 

1,536 

(2,838) 

— 

5,657 

— 

5,657 

—

320

350

(25)

1,176

94

4,802

(2,138)

1,447

324

4,435

3,196

7,631

30. Acquisitions
Ebiquity Germany GmbH
On 11 June 2019, the Group acquired the outstanding 5.97% interest in its subsidiary undertaking, Ebiquity Germany GmbH, 
from the minority shareholder for cash consideration of €380,000 (£336,000) payable in equal instalments in June 2019 and 
October 2019.

31. Disposals
On 12 February 2018, the Group agreed to dispose of the AdIntel business to Nielsen for gross consideration of £26,000,000. 
This transaction was subject to certain conditions, including approval from the Competition and Markets Authority, who 
immediately commenced a Phase I examination. This led to a Phase II examination that was not concluded until November 2018. 
This disposal to Nielsen was completed on 2 January 2019. The gross consideration was dependent upon a working capital target 
position at the date of completion. The working capital acquired by Nielsen was below this target and a resulting repayment was 
made to Nielsen of £1,155,000 on 31 October 2019, resulting in net consideration of £24,845,000.

On 19 March 2018, the Group entered into an agreement to sell the business assets of its Reputation division to Echo Research 
Holdings Limited; a profit of £34,000 was recognised on disposal. This is the remaining part of the Group’s Intel segment in 
addition to the AdIntel business. Completion took place on 31 March 2018. The consideration payable was £36,000, which was 
determined with reference to the revenue performance of the business during the 12 months following completion.

On 21 August 2019, it was decided to wind down the activities of Stratigent LLC, the Chicago-based marketing technology 
business which has been trading at a loss due to significantly reduced demand in the US market for the software technology on 
which its skills were focused. This was the result of a wider review of opportunities for further efficiency gains across the business 
as well as examining investment areas to ensure these fit with the Group’s strategic priorities. As at 31 December 2019, the division 
has one employee and is continuing to fulfil its contractual requirements with its remaining clients.

104

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
32. Contingent liabilities
The Group is subject to claims and litigation arising in the ordinary course of business and provision is made where liabilities are 
considered likely to arise on the basis of current information and legal advice.

33. Related party transactions
The Group has a related party relationship with its subsidiaries (refer to note 14) and key management personnel including 
Directors and Executive Committee members.

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, or between subsidiaries, have been eliminated on consolidation and 
are not disclosed in this note. Details of transactions between the Group and other related parties are disclosed below.

Compensation of key management personnel
The remuneration of the Directors, who are considered to be the key management personnel of the Group, is set out in note 5. 
There were no post-employment or other long-term benefits other than contributions to private pension schemes.

Transactions with companies related to key management personnel
Costs of £2,000 (31 December 2018: £2,000) for a membership subscription were charged to the Company by the Quoted 
Companies Alliance, a company of which Alan Newman is a director.

Costs of £65,000 (31 December 2018: £83,000) for public relations consultancy were charged to the Company by Instinctif 
Partners Limited, a company of which Richard Nichols was a director during the year. As at the year end, £7,000 (31 December 
2018: £5,000) was owed to Instinctif Partners Limited.

34. Events after the reporting period
On 8 January 2020, the Group completed the purchase of Digital Decisions B.V (‘Digital Decisions’). The acquisition was for an 
initial cash consideration of €700,000 (£597,000) with further consideration payable in a mix of cash and Ebiquity plc shares. 
The first deferred payment will be based on performance for the year ending 31 December 2020 and the second payment will be 
based on the average performance in the years ending 31 December 2021 and 31 December 2022. 

On 3 February 2020, the Group announced that it will be acquiring the outstanding 49% interest in its subsidiary Ebiquity 
Italy Media Advisor S.r.l (‘Ebiquity Italy’) from its founders and minority shareholders Arcangelo DiNieri and Maria Gabrielli. 
The transaction will complete in May 2020. The total consideration of €3,600,000 is based on an average of Ebiquity Italy’s 
profit before tax and management charges for the years ending 31 December 2018 and 2019. Since the announcement date, 
the payment terms have been amended. The consideration will now be paid in a combination of cash and Ebiquity plc shares. 
At completion 25% of the total consideration will be paid in Ebiquity plc shares and 5% in cash. The remaining cash will be paid 
over the following 10 months.

The Company continues to closely monitor the COVID-19 pandemic and its impact on our staff, clients and operations. 
Our primary focus is ensuring the safety and well-being of our employees and we have successfully implemented a remote 
working policy for all of our offices globally, although our staff in China have now returned to their offices. 

The COVID-19 disruption is affecting our clients’ businesses and their service requirements, although the extent and timing of its 
impact over the coming months remains uncertain. 

The Company is undertaking prudent cost reduction measures in order to protect the business and preserve cash in the current 
environment. This includes a 20% salary reduction taken by the senior management team and Board, a deferral of the annual 
pay review and temporary freeze on recruitment. The Group is also utilising, to the extent necessary, the different government 
schemes put in place to support businesses in many of the countries in which it operates. To date, these include the selected 
furloughing of staff in the UK and France, and receipt of funds from the US Payroll Protection Program and various government 
subsidies and support schemes in Asia Pacific.

No adjustments have been made to the financial statements in respect of this.

105

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsCompany statement of financial position
as at 31 December 2019

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

Note 

Fixed assets 

Intangible assets 

Right-of-use assets 

Investments in subsidiaries 

Deferred tax asset 

Total fixed assets 

Current assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Total current assets 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities 

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year 

Net assets   

Equity 

Ordinary shares 

Share premium 

Other reserves 

Retained earnings 

Total shareholders’ funds 

6 

7 

8 

9 

2,309 

4,025 

2,107

—

49,082 

75,501

91 

—

55,507 

77,608

10 

22,712 

21,184

263 

48

22,975 

21,232

11 

(44,856) 

(42,772)

(21,881) 

(21,540)

33,626 

56,068

12 

(18,473) 

(33,965)

15,153 

22,103

13 

14 

14 

14 

20,029 

19,778

46 

(733) 

(4,189) 

15,153 

44

(733)

3,014

22,103

The Company has taken advantage of the exemption allowed under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its 
own income statement in these financial statements.

The movement in reserves of the Company includes a loss for the year of £6,864,000 (31 December 2018: loss for the year of 
£1,873,000).

The notes on pages 108 to 118 are an integral part of the financial statements of the Company. The financial statements on 
pages 106 to 107 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 19 May 2020 and were signed on its 
behalf by:

Alan Newman 
Director 

Ebiquity plc. Registered No. 03967525

20 May 2020 

106

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 December 2019

At 31 December 2017 

(Loss) for the year 

Other comprehensive result for the year 

Total comprehensive (loss) for the year 

Proceeds from shares issued 

Share-based payments credit 

Capital contribution relating to share-based payments 

Dividends to shareholders 

At 31 December 2018 

(Loss) for the year 

Other comprehensive result for the year 

Total comprehensive (loss) for the year 

Proceeds from shares issued 

Share-based payments credit 

Capital contribution relating to share-based payments 

Dividends to shareholders 

At 31 December 2019 

Note 

Share 
capital 
£’000 

19,549 

— 

— 

— 

13 

229 

— 

— 

— 

19,778 

— 

— 

— 

251 

— 

— 

— 

13 

13 

13 

Share  
premium  
£’000 

21 

— 

— 

— 

23 

— 

— 

— 

44 

— 

— 

— 

2 

— 

— 

— 

Other  
reserves 
£’000 

(733) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(733) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

4,283 

(1,873) 

— 

Total 
£’000

23,120

(1,873)

—

(1,873) 

(1,873)

— 

522 

609 

(527) 

3,014 

252

522

609

(527)

22,103

(6,864) 

(6,864)

— 

—

(6,864) 

(6,864)

— 

33 

162 

253

33

162

(534) 

(534)

20,029 

46 

(733) 

(4,189) 

15,153

The notes on pages 108 to 118 are an integral part of the financial statements of the Company.

107

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements 
for the year ended 31 December 2019

1. General information
Ebiquity plc (the ‘Company’) acts as a 
holding company and is incorporated 
and domiciled in the UK. The address of 
its registered office is Chapter House, 
16 Brunswick Place, London N1 6DZ.

The financial statements of the 
Company represent the results for the 
year ended 31 December 2019 whilst the 
comparatives represent the results for 
the year ended 31 December 2018. 

The financial statements present 
information about the Company as an 
individual undertaking and not about 
its Group.

2. Basis of preparation
The financial statements of the 
Company have been prepared in 
accordance with Financial Reporting 
Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’ (‘FRS 101’). The financial 
statements have been prepared on 
a going concern basis. The Company 
meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements through its cash reserves 
and borrowings, described in note 20 to 
the consolidated financial statements. 
As at 31 December 2019, the Company 
has undrawn bank facilities available of 
£10,000.000.

The Company’s forecasts and 
projections, taking account of 
reasonably possible changes in trading 
performance, show that the Company 
should be able to operate within the 
level of its current cash reserves and 
borrowings, including continuing to 
meet the bank covenants therein. 

In accordance with the guidance issued 
by the Financial Reporting Council, 
the Directors have given specific 
consideration to the potential impact of 
the COVID-19 pandemic on the global 
economy, the business environment in 
which the Company operates and its 
business in particular. As at the date of 
approval of these financial statements, 
this impact remained highly uncertain 
and difficult to predict. The Directors 
have accordingly considered a range 
of scenarios relating to the impact 
of COVID-19 which they believe are 
plausible, and assessed their impact 
on the Company’s cash flows and 
liquidity for a period of 12 months from 
the date of approval of these financial 
statements. 

108

In this assessment, the Directors had 
regard to the potential reduction in the 
Group’s receipts from clients that may 
arise from the COVID-19 disruption 
and to options that may be available 
to the Group to mitigate any resulting 
negative impact on its cash flows and 
liquidity. These include: (i) draw down 
of all available borrowing facilities; 
(ii) reductions in its operating and 
capital expenditure; and (iii) benefit of 
measures taken by the UK government 
and the Bank of England to assist 
businesses and employees, directly 
or indirectly, to meet their financial 
obligations and maintain their business 
operations during the period of the 
pandemic. 

As a result of this assessment, the 
Directors consider that the Company 
will have sufficient liquidity within 
its existing bank facilities, totalling 
£24,000,000, to meet its obligations 
during the next 12 months. 

The Directors consulted with the 
lenders, Barclays and Royal Bank of 
Scotland, to negotiate covenant waivers 
where required in order to negate the 
risk of any future covenant breaches. 
The existing covenants remain in place 
for the 12 months to March 2020 and 
June 2020. The March 2020 covenants 
have already been achieved, and there 
are no concerns over meeting the June 
2020 covenants; the Group's revenue 
would have to reduce by 21% between 
May and June 2020 compared to the 
latest prudent expectations for a 
breach to result.

Agreement in principle has been 
reached with the lenders to replace the 
existing covenants for September 2020, 
December 2020 and March 2021 with 
a monthly liquidity test that will be in 
place between July 2020 and May 2021. 
This is subject to the agreement of legal 
documentation with the lenders which is 
not yet in place, but which the Directors 
are confident will be shortly. Under the 
Directors’ base case scenario there 
are no forecast breaches of the new 
liquidity covenant tests. The Directors’ 
downside scenario indicates that the 
covenant test at May 2021 is the most 
sensitive but is not breached. If revised 
expectations for this period were to 
worsen then the Directors would take 
the appropriate actions ahead of time 
to reduce operating costs to mitigate 
the likelihood of a breach. 

The covenants revert to the existing 
measures as at June 2021, which under 
the current base case scenario would be 
breached and would need to be waived. 
The Directors are confident, based on 
the support of the lenders that waivers 
would be granted, however, there is a 
risk that this may not occur. This, and 
the risk that the legal documentation 
is not agreed to replace the existing 
covenants for September 2020 to May 
2021, represent a material uncertainty 
that casts significant doubt on the 
Company's ability to continue to 
operate as a going concern. The 
financial statements do not include the 
adjustments that would result if the 
Company were unable to continue as a 
going concern.

The financial statements have been 
prepared under the historical cost 
convention and in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006. The Company 
has taken advantage of the following 
disclosure exemptions under FRS 101:

a.  the requirements of paragraphs 

45(b) and 46-52 of IFRS 2 
‘Share-based Payment’ (details of 
the number of weighted-average 
exercise prices of share options, and 
how the fair value of goods and 
services received was determined);

b.  the requirements of IFRS 7 ‘Financial 

Instruments: Disclosures’;

c.  the requirements of paragraphs 
91 to 99 of IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value 
Measurement’ (disclosure of 
valuation techniques and inputs 
used for ‘fair value measurement’ 
of assets and liabilities);

d.  the requirement in paragraph 38 
of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial 
Statements’ to present comparative 
information in respect of:

I.  paragraph 79(a)(iv) of IAS 1;

II.  paragraph 73(E) of IAS 16 

‘Property, Plant and Equipment’;

III.  paragraph 118(E) of IAS 38 

‘Intangible Assets’ (reconciliations 
between the carrying amount 
at the beginning and end of the 
period);

Ebiquity plcFor share options without performance 
conditions, fair value is measured 
by use of the Black-Scholes model. 
The expected life used in the model has 
been adjusted, based on management’s 
best estimates, for the effects of 
non-transferability, exercise restrictions, 
and behavioural considerations.

The grant by the Company of options 
over its equity instruments to the 
employees of subsidiary undertakings 
in the Group is treated as a capital 
contribution. The fair value of employee 
services received, measured by 
reference to the grant date fair value, 
is recognised over the vesting period as 
an increase to investment in subsidiary 
undertakings, with a corresponding 
credit to equity in the parent entity 
financial statements. 

Dividend income
Dividend income is recognised when the 
right to receive payment is established.

Dividend distribution
Dividend distribution to the Company’s 
shareholders is recognised as a liability 
in the Company’s financial statements 
in the period in which the dividends 
are approved by the Company’s 
shareholders.

Intangible assets
Computer software
Purchased computer software 
intangible assets are amortised on a 
straight-line basis over their useful lives, 
which vary from four to five years.

  The following paragraphs of 

IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial 
Statements’:

I.  10D (statement of cash flows);

II.  16 (statement of compliance with 

all IFRS);

III.  38A (requirement for minimum 
of two primary statements, 
including cash flow statements);

IV. 38B-D (additional comparative 

information);

V.  111 (cash flow statement 

information); and

VI. 134–136 (capital management 

disclosures).

e.  IAS 7 ‘Statement of Cash Flows’;

f.  paragraphs 30 and 31 of IAS 8 

‘Accounting Policies’, changes in 
accounting estimates and errors 
(requirement for the disclosure of 
information when an entity has not 
applied a new IFRS that has been 
issued but is not yet effective);

g.  paragraph 17 of IAS 24 ‘Related 

Party Disclosures’ (key management 
compensation); and

h.  the requirements in IAS 24 ‘Related 

Party Disclosures’ to disclose related 
party transactions entered into 
between two or more members 
of a group.

Summary of significant 
accounting policies
The principal accounting policies 
adopted are set out below. These 
policies have been consistently applied 
to all periods presented, unless 
otherwise stated.

Finance income and expenses
Finance income and expenses 
represents interest receivable and 
payable. Finance income and expense is 
recognised on an accruals basis, based 
on the interest rate applicable to each 
bank or loan account.

Foreign currency transactions
The results and financial position of 
the Company are expressed in pounds 
sterling, which is the functional currency 
of the Company and the presentation 
currency for the Company financial 
statements.

Trading transactions denominated in 
foreign currencies are translated into 
sterling at the exchange rate ruling 
when the transaction was entered 
into. Assets and liabilities expressed in 
foreign currencies are translated into 
sterling at rates of exchange ruling at 
the end of the financial period.

All transactions involving foreign 
exchange gains and losses are dealt 
with through the income statement as 
and when they arise.

Retirement benefits
For defined contribution pension 
schemes, the Company pays 
contributions to privately administered 
pension plans on a voluntary basis. 
The Company has no further payment 
obligations once the contributions have 
been paid. Contributions are charged to 
the income statement in the period to 
which they relate.

Share-based payments
The Company issues equity-settled 
share-based payments to its employees 
and employees of subsidiaries using the 
Company’s equity instruments. These 
are measured at fair value (excluding 
the effect of non-market-based vesting 
conditions) at the date of grant and 
expensed on a straight-line basis over 
the vesting period, based on the Group’s 
estimate of shares that will eventually 
vest and adjusted for the effect of 
non-market-based vesting conditions. 
A corresponding credit is recorded in 
equity.

109

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsNotes to the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

2. Basis of preparation continued
Intangible assets continued
Internally generated intangible assets – 
development expenditure
Internally generated intangible 
assets relate to bespoke computer 
software and technology developed 
by the Group’s internal software 
development team. During the year, 
the Company generated £747,000 of 
internally generated intangible assets 
(31 December 2018: £509,000).

An internally generated intangible asset 
arising from the Group’s development 
expenditure is recognised only if all of 
the following conditions are met:

• 

it is technically feasible to develop 
the asset so that it will be available 
for use or sale;

•  adequate resources are available to 
complete the development and to 
use or sell the asset;

•  there is an intention to complete the 

asset for use or sale;

•  the Group is able to use or sell the 

intangible asset;

• 

it is probable that the asset created 
will generate future economic 
benefits; and

•  the development cost of the asset 

can be measured reliably.

Internally generated intangible assets 
are amortised on a straight-line basis 
over their useful lives. Amortisation 
commences when the asset is available 
for use and useful lives range from one 
to five years. The amortisation expense 
is included within administrative 
expenses. Where an internally 
generated intangible asset cannot be 
recognised, development expenditure is 
recognised as an expense in the period 
in which it is incurred.

Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are 
held at cost less accumulated 
impairment losses.

Where the purchase consideration 
for the acquisition of an interest in a 
subsidiary is contingent on one or more 
future events, the cost of investment 
includes a reasonable estimate of 
the fair value of the amounts of 
consideration that are expected to 
be payable in the future. The cost 
of investment and the contingent 
consideration liability is adjusted 
until the ultimate payable is known.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
cash in hand and short-term deposits. 
In the statement of financial position, 
bank overdrafts are shown within 
borrowings in current liabilities.

Share capital
Equity instruments issued by the 
Company are recorded at the amount 
of the proceeds received, net of direct 
issuance costs.

Deferred taxation
Recognition of deferred tax assets is 
restricted to those instances where it 
is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the difference 
can be utilised. The recognition of 
deferred tax assets is reviewed at each 
year-end date.

The amount of the asset or liability is 
determined using tax rates that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted 
by the year-end date and are expected 
to apply when the deferred tax 
liabilities/assets are settled/recovered.

Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities 
are recognised in the Company’s 
statement of financial position when 
the Company becomes a party 
to the contractual provisions of 
the instrument.

Financial assets
Financial assets are classified, 
at initial recognition, and subsequently 
measured, at fair value through profit 
or loss ('FVPL'), amortised cost, or fair 
value through other comprehensive 
income ('FVOCI').

The classification of financial assets 
at initial recognition depends on the 
financial asset’s contractual cash flow 
characteristics and the Company’s 
business model for managing them. 
In order for a financial asset to be 
classified and measured at amortised 
cost or FVOCI, it needs to give rise to 
cash flows that are ‘solely payments of 
principal and interest’ on the principal 
amount outstanding (the 'SPPI 
Criterion').

Financial assets are initially measured 
at their fair value plus, for those 
financial assets not at fair value 
through profit or loss, transaction costs. 
Purchases or sales of financial assets 
that require delivery of assets within a 
time frame established by regulation or 
convention in the marketplace (regular 
way trades) are recognised on the trade 
date, being the date that the Company 
commits to purchase or sell the asset.

For the purposes of subsequent 
measurement, all of the Company’s 
financial assets are classified as 
financial assets at amortised cost. 
Financial assets at amortised cost 
comprise of assets that are held 
within a business model with the 
objective to hold the financial assets 
in order to collect contractual cash 
flows that meet the SPPI Criterion. 
This category includes the Company’s 
trade and other receivables and cash 
and cash equivalents. These assets are 
subsequently measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest 
method. The amortised cost is reduced 
by impairment losses, interest income, 
foreign exchange gains and losses, 
and impairment losses are recognised 
in profit or loss. Any gain or loss on 
derecognition is recognised in profit or 
loss.

The Company has not classified any 
assets as being financial assets at 
FVOCI or FVPL.

110

Ebiquity plcFinancial liabilities
Financial liabilities are classified, 
at initial recognition, as financial 
liabilities at fair value through profit 
or loss, loans and borrowings, or as 
payables, as appropriate.

All financial liabilities are recognised 
initially at fair value and, in the 
case of loans and borrowings and 
payables, net of directly attributable 
transaction costs.

The Company’s financial liabilities 
comprise of trade and other payables 
and borrowings.

The Company’s payables are 
subsequently measured at amortised 
cost. Gains and losses are recognised 
in profit or loss when the liabilities 
are derecognised.

Borrowings consisting of 
interest-bearing secured and 
unsecured loans and overdrafts are 
initially recognised at fair value net of 
directly attributable transaction costs 
incurred and subsequently measured 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method. The difference 
between the proceeds received net of 
transaction costs and the redemption 
amount is amortised over the period 
of the borrowings to which they relate. 
The revolving credit facility is considered 
to be a long-term loan.

Executive Share Option Plan  
(‘ESOP’)
The ESOP’s investment in the 
Company’s shares is deducted from 
shareholders’ equity in the statement 
of financial position as if they were 
treasury shares, except that profits on 
the sale of ESOP shares are not credited 
to the share premium account.

Critical accounting estimates 
and judgements 
In preparing the financial statements, 
the Directors have made certain 
estimates and judgements relating 
to the reporting of results of 
operations and the financial position 
of the Company. Actual results 
may significantly differ from those 
estimates, often as the result of the 
need to make assumptions about 
matters which are uncertain. The 
estimates and judgements discussed 
below are considered by the Directors to 
be those that have a critical accounting 
impact to the financial statements. 

Critical accounting estimates include 
the terminal growth rate used in 
impairment assessments, inputs to 
share option accounting fair value 
models and amounts to capitalise as 
intangible assets. These estimates are 
reached with reference to historical 
experience, supporting detailed 
analysis and, in the case of impairment 
assessments and share option 
accounting, external economic factors.

Critical accounting judgements include 
the treatment of events after the 
reporting period determined to be 
adjusting or non-adjusting events 
and the terminal growth rate used in 
impairment assessments.

Investments
The Company has recorded an asset 
for investment in subsidiary companies. 
The Directors believe the carrying value 
of these investments is supported by 
their underlying net assets. Any changes 
to the carrying value of investments 
after the measurement period are 
recognised in the income statement.

Adoption of new standards 
and interpretations
On 1 January 2019, the Company 
adopted the following amendments 
which are effective for accounting 
periods beginning on or after 
1 January 2019.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ (effective on or 
after 1 January 2019). This standard 
replaces IAS 17 ‘Leases’ and related 
interpretations and sets out the 
principles for the recognition, 
measurement, presentation and 
disclosure of leases for both the lessee 
and the lessor. The standard addresses 
the definition of a lease, recognition 
and measurement of leases, and it 
establishes principles for reporting 
useful information to users of financial 
statements about the leasing activities 
of both lessees and lessors. A key 
change arising from IFRS 16 is that most 
operating leases will be accounted for 
on the statement of financial position 
for lessees. The operating lease charge 
is replaced by a depreciation charge and 
an interest charge. IFRS 16 eliminates 
the two lease classifications that IAS 17 
has (operating and finance leases) for 
the lessee, and instead all leases will 
have the same classification.

IFRS 16 has been applied in these 
financial statements using the modified 
retrospective method, meaning the 
comparatives have not been restated to 
reflect the effects of IFRS 16.

The standard requires the Company 
to recognise a ‘right-of-use’ asset, 
representing the right to use the 
underlying asset, and a corresponding 
lease liability, representing the 
obligation to make lease payments, 
on its statement of financial position, 
for almost all lease contracts. 

The impact on the income statement is 
that former operating lease expenses 
are replaced by depreciation and 
interest, thereby improving EBITDA. 
Total expenses (depreciation of 
right-of-use assets and interest on 
lease liabilities) are typically higher in the 
earlier years of a lease and lower in the 
later years, in comparison with former 
accounting for operating leases. 

The main impact on the statement 
of cash flows is higher cash flows 
from operating activities, since cash 
payments for the principal part of the 
lease liability are classified in the net 
cash flow from financing activities. 

The tax effect from the adjustments 
from IFRS 16 have been measured and 
recognised accordingly. 

111

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsNotes to the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

2. Basis of preparation continued
Adoption of new standards and interpretations continued
The change in accounting policy has impacted the primary statements as follows:

Operating lease rentals   

Depreciation charge 

Interest expense 

Right-of-use assets 

Impairment of right-of-use assets 

Lease liabilities 

Accruals 

Other debtors 

Deferred tax asset 

Cash flows from operating activities   

Cash flows from financing activities 

Total impact 

Income 
statement 
debit/ 
(credit) 

Statement  
of financial 
position 
debit/ 
(credit) 

Cash flow  
statement 
inflow/ 
(outflow)

(84) 

472 

90 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(91) 

— 

— 

— 

(472) 

(90) 

5,001 

(504) 

(4,630) 

588 

(371) 

91 

— 

— 

387 

(387) 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Accounting policy for leases 
The Company has a lease arrangement for buildings. At the inception of a lease contract, the Company assesses whether the 
contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a certain period in exchange for a consideration, in which 
case it is identified as a lease. The Company then recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability at the 
lease commencement date. Lease-related assets and liabilities are measured on a present value basis. Lease-related assets 
and liabilities are subjected to re-measurement when either terms are modified or lease assumptions have changed. Such an 
event results in the lease liability being re-measured to reflect the measurement of the present value of the remaining lease 
payments, discounted using the discount rate at the time of the change. The lease assets are adjusted to reflect the change 
in the re-measured liabilities. 

Right‑of‑use assets: 

Right-of-use assets include the net present value of the following components:

•  the initial measurement of the lease liability;

• 

• 

lease payments made before the commencement date of the lease; 

initial direct costs; and

•  costs to restore. 

The right-of-use assets are reduced for lease incentives relating to the lease. The right-of-use assets are depreciated on a 
straight-line basis over the duration of the contract. In the event that the lease contract becomes onerous, the right-of-use asset 
is impaired for the part which has become onerous.

Lease liabilities:

Lease liabilities include the net present value of the following components: 

•  fixed payments excluding lease incentive receivables;

•  future contractually agreed fixed increases; and

•  payments related to renewals or early termination, in case options to renew or for early termination are reasonably certain to 

be exercised. 

The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease. If such rate cannot be determined, the lessee’s 
incremental borrowing rate is used, being the rate that the lessee would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to obtain 
an asset of similar value in a similar economic environment with similar terms and conditions. The discount rate that is used to 
calculate the present value reflects the interest rate applicable to the lease at inception of the contract. Lease contracts entered 
into in a currency different to the local functional currency are subjected to periodic foreign currency revaluations which are 
recognised in the income statement in net finance costs. 

The lease liabilities are subsequently increased by the interest costs on the lease liabilities and decreased by lease payments made.

112

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3. Company results for the year
The Company has taken advantage of the exemption allowed under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its 
own income statement in these financial statements.

The movement in reserves of the Company includes a loss for the year of £6,864,000 (31 December 2018: loss for the year 
of £1,873,000).

4. Operating loss
Auditors’ remuneration
Fees for the audit of the Company were £3,000 (31 December 2018: £3,000). Fees paid to the Company’s auditors for services 
other than the statutory audit of the Company are disclosed in note 4 to the consolidated financial statements.

Directors’ remuneration
Fees paid to the Company’s Directors are disclosed in note 5 to the consolidated financial statements.

5. Tax on loss on ordinary activities

The tax charge is made up as follows:   

Current tax 

Deferred tax 

Origination and reversal of timing differences 

Taxation on ordinary activities 

Total tax credit 

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

19 

(91) 

— 

(72) 

—

—

—

—

The tax assessment for the year differs to the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19.00% (31 December 2018: 19.00%). 

The differences are explained below:

Year ended 

Year ended 
  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

(Loss) on ordinary activities before taxation 

(Loss) on ordinary activities at the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19.00%  
(31 December 2018: 19.00%) 

(6,936) 

(1,873)

(1,318) 

(356)

Effects of:   

Expenses not deductible/(income) not taxable 

Depreciation in excess of capital allowances 

Additions to intangibles   

Relieved to other Group companies 

Adjustments to tax charge in respect of prior years  

Withholding tax suffered 

Deferred tax 

Current tax credit for the year 

269 

— 

(127) 

1,176 

15 

4 

(91) 

(72) 

(26)

120

110

152

—

—

—

—

Deferred tax on unremitted earnings has not been recognised as management does not intend to pay dividends from jurisdictions 
where a tax charge would be incurred and dividends received are not taxed in the UK.

113

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

  Research and 
  development 
£’000 

Computer 
software 
£’000 

2,053 

1,565 

747 

(391) 

(157) 

11 

— 

— 

Total 
£’000

3,618

758

(391)

(157)

2,252 

1,576 

3,828

(864) 

(647) 

(1,511)

157 

388 

(267) 

(586) 

1,666 

1,189 

— 

— 

(286) 

(933) 

157

388

(553)

(1,519)

643 

918 

2,309

2,107

Buildings 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

— 

— 

5,001  

5,001  

— 

(472) 

(504) 

(976) 

—

—

 5,001 

 5,001 

—

(472)

(504)

(976)

4,025  

 4,025 

— 

—

6. Intangible assets

Cost 

At 1 January 2019 

Additions 

Disposals 

Transfer 

At 31 December 2019 

Amortisation 

At 1 January 2019 

Transfer 

Disposals    

Charge for the year 

At 31 December 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2018 

7. Right-of-use assets and lease liabilities
Right-of-use assets: 

Cost 

At 31 December 2018 

Assets recognised on adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019 

Additions  

At 31 December 2019 

Accumulated depreciation 

At 31 December 2018 

Charge for the year  

Impairment for the year   

At 31 December 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2018 

114

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Lease liabilities:

Cost 

At 31 December 2018 

Liabilities recognised on adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019 

Additions  

Cash payments in the year 

Interest charge in the year 

At 31 December 2019 

Current 

Non-current 

The present value of the minimum lease payments are as follows:   

Amounts due: 

Within one year 

Between one and two years  

Between two and three years 

Between three and four years 

Between four and five years 

Later than five years 

8. Investments in subsidiaries

Cost and net book value 

At 31 December 2018 

Additions 

Impairment 

Disposals    

At 31 December 2019 

Buildings 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

— 

— 

—

—

4,630 

4,630

— 

90 

4,720 

502 

4,218 

—

90

4,720

502

4,218

Minimum lease payments

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

955  

1,264  

1,264  

1,264  

319  

— 

5,066 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

£’000 

75,501

165

(7,754)

(18,830)

49,082

The Company’s principal trading subsidiaries and associated undertakings are listed in note 14 to the consolidated 
financial statements. 

An impairment of £7,754,000 was recognised in relation to the investment held in Ebiquity US Financing Limited and Ebiquity 
Holdings Inc so that the carrying value was adjusted to be in line with the value-in-use. 

The Directors believe that the carrying value of the remaining investments is supported by their underlying net assets, based on 
the impairment assessment carried out, as described in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

The disposal in the year relates to the sale of the investment in the AdIntel business, the sale of which completed on 
2 January 2019. The profit resulting on disposal was £5,920,000 and has been recognised in the income statement in the year.

115

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

9. Deferred tax asset 

At 1 January 2018 

Credit/(charge) to income 

Reclassification of available-for-sale asset 

At 31 December 2018 

Credit to income 

At 31 December 2019  

The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balance for financial reporting purposes:

Deferred tax assets – non-current 

Deferred tax liabilities – current 

Deferred tax liabilities – non-current 

Deferred tax has been recognised in the year on adoption of IFRS 16.

10. Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings  

Other receivables 

Other taxation and social security 

Prepayments 

Tangible 
assets 
£’000 

Total 
£’000

— 

— 

— 

— 

91 

91 

—

—

—

—

91

91

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

91 

— 

— 

91 

—

—

—

—

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

170 

—

21,861 

19,954

230 

— 

451 

514

65

651

22,712 

 21,184 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings are unsecured, non-interest bearing, have no fixed date of repayment and are repayable 
on demand.

11. Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Trade creditors 

Amounts owed to Group undertakings 

Corporation tax 

Lease liabilities (note 7)   

Other taxation and social security 

Accruals 

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

(36) 

787 

2,314

1,027

41,817 

37,539

15 

502 

281 

—

—

—

1,490 

44,856 

1,892

42,772

Included within amounts owed to Group undertakings is an amount which is unsecured, incurs interest at 5.5% plus Bank 
of England base rate, has no fixed date of repayment and is repayable on demand. The residual amounts owed to Group 
undertakings are unsecured, interest free, have no fixed date of repayment and are repayable on demand.

116

Ebiquity plc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
12. Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

Bank loans – between two and five years  

Provisions   

Lease liabilities (note 7)   

  31 December  31 December 
2018 
£’000

2019 
£’000 

13,868 

33,965

387 

4,218 

—

—

18,473 

33,965

On 20 September 2019, the Group refinanced its banking facilities with Barclays and Royal Bank of Scotland and on 
20 September 2019 drew down on these new facilities. The new committed facility, totalling £24,000,000, comprises a revolving 
credit facility (‘RCF’) of £23,000,000 (of which £14,000,000 was drawn on refinance) and £1,000,000 available as an overdraft 
for working capital purposes. The RCF has a maturity date of 20 September 2023. The drawn RCF and any further drawings 
under the RCF are repayable on maturity of the facility. The facility may be used for deferred consideration payments on past 
acquisitions, to fund future potential acquisitions, and for general working capital requirements.

Loan arrangement fees of £168,000 (31 December 2018: £100,000) are offset against the term loan, and are being amortised 
over the period of the loan. £36,000 of loan arrangement fees have been included within creditors due within one year and the 
balancing £132,000 has been included within creditors due after more than one year.

The facility bears variable interest of LIBOR plus a margin of 2.25%. The margin rate is able to be lowered each quarter end 
depending on the Group’s net debt to EBITDA ratio.

The undrawn amount of the revolving credit facility is liable to a fee of 40% of the prevailing margin. The Group may elect to 
prepay all or part of the outstanding loan subject to a break fee, by giving five business days’ notice.

All amounts owing to the bank are guaranteed by way of fixed and floating charges over the current and future assets of the Group. 
As such, a composite guarantee has been given by all significant subsidiary companies in the UK, US, Germany and Australia.

The provision represents the expected costs of vacating the London property. It was recognised on signing the lease agreement 
during the year.

Lease liabilities were recognised on the signing of the lease agreement during the year in accordance with IFRS 16.

13. Ordinary shares

Allotted, called up and fully paid 

At 31 December 2017 – ordinary shares of 25p 

Share options exercised   

Shares issued 

At 31 December 2018 – ordinary shares of 25p 

Share options exercised   

Shares issued 

At 31 December 2019 – ordinary shares of 25p 

Number 
of shares 

Nominal 
value 
£’000

78,197,461 

19,549

— 

915,729 

—

229

79,113,190 

19,778

— 

1,002,436 

—

251

  80,115,626 

20,029

Ordinary shares carry voting rights which are entitled to share in the profits of the Company. During the year, the Company paid 
a dividend of 0.71p per share, a total of £534,000 (31 December 2018: 0.71p with a total of £527,000), to shareholders.

117

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2019

14. Reserves 
Share premium
The share premium reserve shows the amount subscribed for share capital in excess of the nominal value. 

Other reserves
Other reserves consists of the merger reserve and ESOP reserve.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve arose on the issuance of shares at a premium on a Group restructure, where the premium on issue qualified 
for merger relief. There has been no movement in the year.

ESOP reserve
The ESOP reserve represents the cost of own shares acquired in the Company by the Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’). 
The purpose of the EBT is to facilitate and encourage the ownership of shares by employees, by acquiring shares in the Company 
and distributing them in accordance with employee share schemes. The EBT may operate in conjunction with the Company’s 
existing share option schemes and other schemes that may apply from time to time.

The ESOP trusts were created to award shares to certain employees at less than market value. The trusts in aggregate hold 
unallocated shares costing £1,471,000 (31 December 2018: £1,471,000) funded by the Company. The sponsoring company 
is responsible for the administration and maintenance of the trust. The number of shares held by the trust is 4,201,504 
(31 December 2018: 4,201,504), all of which are under option to the employees of the Group. As at the statement of financial 
position date, all of the shares in the ESOP had vested (31 December 2018: all had vested).

Retained earnings
The retained earnings reserve shows the cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the income statement. For detailed 
movements on each of the above reserves, refer to the statement of changes in equity.

The distributable reserves of the Company total £nil (31 December 2018: £3,014,000).

A capital reduction will be completed in order to increase distributable reserves post year end to enable future dividends to 
be declared. 

15. Share-based payments
Full disclosure of share-based payments is included in the consolidated financial statements (see note 26 to the consolidated 
financial statements).

16. Commitments
Capital commitments contracted but not provided for by the Company amount to £nil (31 December 2018: £nil). 

17. Contingent liabilities
The Company is subject to claims and litigation arising in the ordinary course of business and provision is made where liabilities 
are considered likely to arise on the basis of current information and legal advice.

18. Related party transactions
Under FRS 101.8(k), the Company is exempt from the requirement to disclose transactions with entities that are part of the 
Ebiquity plc group, or investees of the Group qualifying as related parties, as all of the Company’s voting rights are controlled 
within the Group. The Company has no other material related parties. Related party transactions are detailed in note 33 to the 
consolidated financial statements. 

Transactions with key management personnel 
FRS 101.8(j) exempts entities from the disclosures in respect of the compensation of key management personnel.

118

Ebiquity plcAdvisers

Independent auditors
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
1 Embankment Place 
London WC2N 6RH

Nominated adviser and broker
Numis Securities Limited
The London Stock Exchange Building 
10 Paternoster Square 
London EC4M 7LT

Registrars
Computershare Investor Services plc
PO Box 82 
The Pavilions 
Bridgwater Road 
Bristol BS99 7NH

Shareholder 
information

Country of incorporation
Ebiquity plc is registered and 
incorporated in England and Wales. 

Number of securities in issue
As of 20 May 2020, the Company’s 
issued share capital consists of 
80,125,626 ordinary shares of 25p each. 
The Company has no treasury shares. 

Details of any restrictions 
on the transfer of securities
There are no restrictions on any of 
the Company’s AIM securities. 

Securities not in public hands
As of 20 May 2020, the percentage of 
the Company’s issued share capital that 
is not in public hands is 66.49%.

Company registration 
Registered office
Chapter House 
16 Brunswick Place 
London N1 6DZ  

Company number 03967525

119

Annual report and financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019Strategic reportCorporate governanceFinancial statementsGlossary

AdIntel 

Advertising Intelligence

AIM 

ANA 

Board 

CEO 

CGUs  

Digital  
Decisions 

Alternative Investment Market

Association of National Advertisers

the Board of Directors of Ebiquity plc

Chief Executive Officer

cash-generating units

Digital Decisions B.V 

Ebiquity Italy  Ebiquity Italy Media Advisor S.r.l

Ebiquity or  
the Company  

Ebiquity plc 

EBIT  

earnings before interest and tax

EBITDA  

 earnings before interest, tax, depreciation 
and amortisation

EBT  

EIP  

Employee Benefit Trust

Executive Incentive Plan

EMI scheme  Enterprise Management Incentive scheme

EPS  

ESOP  

FMCG 

FRS 101  

earnings per share

Executive Share Option Plan

fast-moving consumer goods

 Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced 
Disclosure Framework’

IASB  

IFRS  

IPA  

ISBA  

KPIs  

International Accounting Standards Board

International Financial Reporting Standards

Institute of Practitioners in Advertising

Incorporated Society of British Advertisers

key performance indicators

LIBOR  

London Interbank Offered Rate

Like‑for‑like  

 prior year results are adjusted to include the 
results of recent acquisitions as if they had been 
owned for the same period in the prior year

LTIP  

Long-Term Incentive Plan

Net debt  

 long-term borrowings, short-term borrowings 
less cash and cash equivalents

Nielsen 

Nielsen Media Research Limited

PwC  

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

QCA Code 

 Quoted Companies Alliance 
Corporate Governance Code

RCF  

ROI 

TSR  

revolving credit facility

return on investment

total shareholder return

UCSOP  

Unapproved Company Share Option Plan

Underlying 
performance 

underlying performance refers to the results  
 of operations before highlighted items

FVOCI 

fair value through other comprehensive income

WFA  

World Federation of Advertisers 

FVPL 

fair value through profit or loss

the Group  

Ebiquity plc and its subsidiaries

Highlighted   highlighted items comprise non-cash  
items 

 charges and non-recurring items which are 
highlighted in the income statement because 
separate disclosure is considered relevant in 
understanding the underlying performance of 
the business

120

Ebiquity plcThe paper used in this report is produced using virgin wood fibre from well-managed, 
FSC®-certified forests and other controlled sources. All pulps used are elemental 
chlorine free and manufactured at a mill that has been awarded the ISO 14001 and 
EMAS certificates for environmental management. The use of the FSC® logo identifies 
products which contain wood from well-managed forests and other controlled sources 
certified in accordance with the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council®.

Designed and produced by

Printed by an FSC® and ISO 14001 certified company.

www.lyonsbennett.com

E

b

i

q

u

i

t

y

p

l

c

|

A

n

n

u

a

l

r

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

f

i

n

a

n

c

i

a

l

s

t

a

t

e

m

e

n

t

s

f

o

r

t

h

e

y

e

a

r

e

n

d

e

d

3

1

D

e

c

e

m

b

e

r

2

0

1

9

Ebiquity plc

Chapter House 
16 Brunswick Place 
London N1 6DZ

www.ebiquity.com

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
i

E
b
q
u
i
t
y
p
l
c
|
A
n
n
u
a

l

r
e
p
o
r
t
a
n
d
f
i
n
a
n
c
i
a

l
s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s
f
o
r

t
h
e
y
e
a
r
e
n
d
e
d
3
1
D
e
c
e
m
b
e
r
2
0
1
9